JP6528658B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball entry port in which game balls are formed so as to be capable of entering a ball, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry port, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members a drive means you, is placed at the first position by the driving force of the driving means is a pair of wing members to allow ball entrance of game ball into Once opened ball entrance opening, a pair of the driving force of the driving means There is known a gaming machine provided with a regulation means disposed at a second position which regulates the entry of the gaming ball into the ball entry opening when the wing member is closed (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-172833, A

  However, in the gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the effect of restricting the game ball from being illegally inserted into the ball entrance is insufficient.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can easily restrict the game ball from being illegally inserted into the ball entrance.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a ball entry opening formed with ball entry balls, a pair of wing members disposed sandwiching the ball entry opening, and a pair of them. and drive means of the blade member to grant driving force, disposed in a first position for allowing the ball entrance of game ball into the pair of wings when member is opened before filling ball neck by a driving force of the driving means It is, which has a regulating means which is disposed in a second position for regulating the ball entrance of game ball into the front the pair of blade members are closed filled bulb mouth by the driving force of said driving means, The transmission mechanism includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism is slide-displaced between the first slide position and the second slide position by the driving force of the driving means. Transmission member and slide of the slide transmission member to the first slide position Is moved to the first rotational position by id displacement to open the pair of wing members, and is rotated to the second rotational position by slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the second slide position to close the pair of wing members And the rotation transmitting member is rotated to the first rotational position in a state where the restricting means is disposed on the slide transmitting member, and the slide transmitting member is disposed at the second slide position. When the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged, the slide displacement to the first slide position of the slide transmission member is restricted, and the restriction means includes the pair of wing members There is formed so as to be maintained state odor driving force is released the pair of blade members are opened without being granted the closed state or the drive means Te before Symbol second position.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2 , a driving force is applied to a ball entry port where game balls are formed so as to be capable of entering a ball, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball head, and a pair of wing members. Drive means for applying, and when the pair of wing members is opened by the drive force of the drive means, it is disposed at a first position that allows game balls to enter the ball entry port, and the drive force of the drive means Control means disposed at a second position for restricting the ball entry of the gaming ball into the ball entry opening when the pair of wing members is closed, and the driving force of the driving means is A slide transmission member comprising a transmission mechanism for transmitting to a pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism being slide-displaced between a first slide position and a second slide position by the driving force of the drive means, and the slide transmission member first rotation by a sliding displacement of said the first slide position Is rotated to the location opening the pair of wing members, and a rotation transmitting member for closing the pair of wing members by the sliding displacement is rotated to a second rotational position of the to the second slide position of the slide transmission member wherein the said restriction means to the rotation transmitting member is arranged, wherein the slide transfer member is disposed in the second slide position state where the rotation transmitting member is disposed in the second rotation position, the rotation transmission member And the slide transmission member are engaged to restrict rotation of the rotation transmission member to the first rotational position, and the restriction means is in a state in which the pair of wing members is closed or the drive means In the state where the driving force is not applied and the pair of wing members is open, the pair of wing members can be maintained at the second position .

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to easily restrict that the game ball is illegally inserted into the ball entrance.

According to claim 2 gaming machine according can easily regulate the Yu technique spheres are illegally ball entrance to enter the sphere outlet.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a game board. It is a perspective front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of a winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a prize-winning mouth unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member and a 1st motorized item. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of a drive unit and the 1st motorized item. (A) And (b) is a front view of a drive unit and a 1st motorized item. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 500 in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. 10 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of a prize-winning mouth unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st motorized item and a drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18 (a), and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 18 (b) is there. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st motorized item and a drive unit. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of the drive unit in a range XXIIa of FIG. 21 (a), and (b) is a partial enlarged side view of the drive unit in a range XXIIb of FIG. 21 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of a left wing member, (b) is a front perspective view of a right wing member. (A) is a front view of a prize-winning mouth unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the prize-winning mouth unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line of FIG. 24 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a prize-winning mouth unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a prize-winning mouth unit. (A) is a top view of a prize-winning mouth unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the prize-winning opening unit in the XXVIIb-XXVIIb line | wire of Fig.27 (a). (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the prize-winning mouth unit in range XXVIII of FIG.27 (b). It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in range XXIX of FIG. (A) is a front view of a decorative symbol display apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display apparatus in the XXXb-XXXb line | wire of Fig.30 (a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a decorative symbol display device. It is a disassembled perspective back view of a decorative symbol display apparatus. (A) is the front view which expanded the inner reel, (b) is a front view which expanded the outer reel. It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display apparatus in the XXXIV-XXXIV line | wire of FIG. 30 (a). It is the elements on larger scale of the decorative symbol display apparatus in range XXXV of FIG. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a rotation member, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation member in the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line | wire of Fig.36 (a). It is a front view of a segment display. It is an exploded view of a segment display. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a side view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a up-and-down displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a 2nd segment unit, (b) is a rear view of a 2nd segment unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 2nd segment unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 2nd segment unit. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd segment unit in the XLV-XLV line of FIG. 42 (a). It is a side view of a base member. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd segment unit in the XLVII-XLVII line of FIG. 42 (a). It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a up-and-down displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a displacement member, (b) is a side view of a displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a displacement member. It is sectional drawing of the displacement member in the LIII-LIII line of FIG. 51 (a). It is a front view of a displacement member. It is a front view of a segment display apparatus and a decorative symbol display apparatus. It is a schematic diagram of a segment display apparatus and a decorative symbol display apparatus. (A) to (c) are front views of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a side view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the LVIIIb-LVIIIb line | wire of Fig.57 (a). (A) is a side view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the LVIIIb-LVIIIb line | wire of Fig.57 (a). (A) is a side view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the LVIIIb-LVIIIb line | wire of Fig.57 (a). It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the rotation member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation member in the LXIVb-LXIVb line | wire of Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of an outer reel unit, (b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of Drawing 66 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a rotation member, (b) is a sectional view of the rotation member in the LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb line of Drawing 68 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of an annular member, (b) is sectional drawing of the annular member in the LXXb-LXXb line | wire of Fig.70 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a rotation member, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation member in the LXXIIb-LXXIIb line | wire of Fig.72 (a). (A) is the elements on larger scale of an outer reel unit, (b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit in the LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb line of Drawing 73 (a). (A) is a front view of the rotation member in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotation member. (A) to (c) are side views of a drive unit and a first motorized part. (A) to (c) are front views of a drive unit and a first motorized part. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a prize-winning mouth unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the drive unit in 8th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st motorized item and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st motorized item and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a prize-winning mouth unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a prize-winning mouth unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the drive unit in 9th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st motorized item and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st motorized item and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a prize-winning mouth unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a prize-winning mouth unit. (A) is a front view of the displacement member in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a displacement member. It is sectional drawing of a up-and-down displacement unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the up-and-down displacement unit in range XCI of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the up-and-down displacement unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 95 (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 95 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95 (a). FIG. 96 (a) is a top view of a winning opening unit according to a thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 96 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 96 (a). (A) is a perspective front view of the left wing member in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98 (a), (c) is FIG. 98 (b) It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the right wing member in a XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of a. (A) is a partially expanded view of the game board in 15th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the XCIXb-XCIXb line | wire of FIG. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a game board, (b) is a sectional view of the game board in the Cb-Cb line of Drawing 100 (a). FIG. 101 (a) is a front view of the first motorized part and the drive unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 101 (b) is a cross section of the first motored part and drive unit 8530 along the line CIb-CIb in FIG. It is a figure, (c) is a sectional view of the 1st electric part and drive unit in the CIc-CIc line of Drawing 101 (b). (A) And (b) is a side view of the 1st electrically-driven workpiece and drive unit in 17th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a prize-winning mouth unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a prize-winning mouth unit. FIG. 105 (a) is a partially enlarged view of a rotating member in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display apparatus in 18th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 63, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 2 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 2, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 4, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 4, a ball emitting unit 112 a (see FIG. 4) for emitting a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding the ball emitted from the ball emitting unit 112 a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an open / close shaft 5 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 5c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with a top surface opened and projecting upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used to, for example, change the aspect of the effect displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 (see FIG. 2) or change the content of the effect of super reach, etc. Operated by a person.

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a display lamp 34 is provided which incorporates a light emitting means such as an LED and can display the payout of the prize ball and the occurrence of an error.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be viewed. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Below the window portion 5c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 76 and 77. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with thin plate materials, and various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side are formed so as to be invisible to the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by tapping screw etc. from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5 c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 77, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 76 and the outer rails 77, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a winning opening etc. is provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. Rubber rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a certain amount of momentum hits the rubber pair 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed in the lower left side of the game area in the front view (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 has a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (in a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 140 by increasing the probability of hitting a second symbol to be described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 140 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the first motorized symbol 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, and it is longer than normal. The time is set. When the first motorized product 520 is in the open state (opened state), the second winning opening 140 is compared to the case where the first motorized object 520 is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to win the ball. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 140 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the first motorized symbol 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 or changing the opening time during a definite change or during a time cut, a single hit is made. In this case, the number of times the first motorized product 520 is opened may be changed to be larger than that during the normal operation. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during positive or negative, and the first motorized symbol 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first motorized symbol is held once At least one of the number of times of opening 520 may be changed. In addition, the time during which the first motorized symbol 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened or the number of times the first motorized symbol 520 is opened at one time does not change during definite change or during time saving. Only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed to be higher than that of the normal pattern.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by a winning (start winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third The second symbol display device (shown in the figure is composed of a segment display device 600 and a decorative symbol display device 800 for performing variable display of symbols, and an LED for fluctuating display of the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the first through gate 66 And is provided.

  Further, in the variable display unit 80, a center frame 86 is disposed so as to surround the outer periphery of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 are visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  In the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display and the displacement operation are performed according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that, instead of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, for example, a liquid crystal display may be used to display the gaming state.

  The second symbol display device alternates a symbol of “o” as a display symbol (a second symbol (not shown)) and a symbol of “x” for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of “o”), the first motorized symbol 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the first motorized product 520 of the second winning opening 140 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the definite change and during the short hours.

  In addition, the second winning opening during positive or negative time by other methods, such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the first motorized part 520 per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win to 140, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the first motorized role object 520 with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board among the balls launched to the game board. When the ball passes the first through gate 66, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Also in), it is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, segment display It may be performed using a part of the device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). . Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which a ball can win is disposed. When the ball is won in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. In FIG. 4, a jackpot lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 140 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 140 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball has won to the second prize opening 140 may be set to five.

  The second winning opening 140 is accompanied by a first motorized symbol 520. The first motorized product 520 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first motorized product 520 is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is less likely to win the second winning opening 140 There is. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first motorized symbol 520 is displayed. The ball is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to be awarded to the second winning opening 140.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” tends to be displayed, and the number of times the first motorized product 520 is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during a definite change or during a short time, the time during which the first motorized part 520 is opened is usually longer than during the middle period. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win a prize at the second winning opening 140 as compared to normal time or during a definite change.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won the second winning opening 140 than in the case where the ball has won the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric combination 520 as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it is possible to always win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases where the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 140 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball to the first through gate 66, the first motorized symbol 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in the open state during definite variation or time, and the second winning opening 140 is won The ball is shot so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display unit 80 toward the second winning opening 140 (so-called “right-handed”), and the first through gate 66 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140 as well as opening the first motorized role product 520.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided substantially at the center. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a big hit, the stop of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed While turning on the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be a symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, and the occurrence of a big hit is indicated Be Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first winning opening 64, for example, The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  Also, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, a pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, segment display device 600 and decorative symbol display device 800, and lottery of display results in second symbol display device by MPU 201. Perform the main process of

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 performed by the display control device 114 such as display and preview effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. The other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines and determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110. The display mode is notified to the display control device 114 by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the mode displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player. And instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the effect at the time of super reach. When the mode to be displayed is changed, information on the mode to be displayed after the change is included in order to display the decoration according to the mode to be displayed after the change on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. A rear surface image change command is sent to the display control device 114. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third pattern, which is a main image to be displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Also, in response to the display content, the lamp display device 227 is controlled to turn on and off.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600, and the decorative symbol display device 800, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. It is to control the display of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol and the like. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby displaying the display of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 and the voice from the voice output device 226. It can be combined with the output.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. Note that FIG. 13 illustrates the state where the winning opening unit 500 is disassembled from the gaming board 13.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the winning opening unit 500 is formed by dividing two rails 76 and 77 embedded on the front of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. It is inserted from the front side into an opening 13a formed below the region. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 500 will be described later.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. 6 is a perspective front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. 8 and 9 are front views of the operation unit 300. FIG.

  In FIG. 8, the pair of upper and lower pairs of the displacement members 670 arranged in the upper and lower sides of the segment display device 600 is retracted from the aspect shown in FIG. The state in which the displacement member 670 provided is projected to the upper and lower center positions is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the operation unit 300 includes a back case 400 formed in a box shape, and in the inner space of the back case 400, a decorative symbol display device 800, a segment display device 600 and a decoration unit 700. Will be accommodated.

  The rear case 400 includes a bottom wall portion 401 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 402 erected from the outer edge of four sides of the bottom wall portion 401 to the front, and the respective wall portions 401 and 402 It forms in the box shape which one side (front side) was open | released. In the bottom wall portion 401, an opening 401a in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and the segment display device 600 is disposed from the back side of the back case 400 through the opening 401a.

  Three decorative symbol display devices 800 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction in the opening 401 a of the bottom wall portion 401 of the back case 400. In the decorative symbol display device 800, an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) which are rotationally displaced in the vertical direction are disposed, and decorated on the outer peripheral surfaces of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. It is configured to allow the player to visually recognize the manner in which the symbol fluctuates (rotates). The detailed description of the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described later.

  The segment display device 600 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400, and covers the decorative symbol display device 800. A predetermined gap is formed between the opposing sides of the base member 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative symbol display device 800, and the decorative symbol display device 800 is disposed between the gaps to allow the player to see from the player side. , And the decorative symbol display device 800 can be viewed.

  In the segment display device 600, a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) capable of displacing the front of the gap between the facing base members 660 described above is disposed. By displacing forward, it is possible to form an effect form that makes the decorative symbol display device 800 invisible from the player side. The detailed description of the segment display device 600 will be described later.

  The decoration units 700 are formed in a box shape having a rectangular shape in a front view and a horizontal shape, and a pair of the decoration units 700 are disposed above and below the segment display device 600. The decoration unit 700 is formed of a transparent resin material, and is formed in a shape that imitates the logo, title, etc. of the pachinko machine 10. Further, an LED base for emitting light is disposed inside the decoration unit 700, and the player side is formed so as to be capable of emitting light.

  Next, the winning opening unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the winning opening unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13.

  10A is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 10B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 500. As shown in FIG. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 510 and the first motor-driven workpiece 520.

  As shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 13, the winning opening unit 500 has a base member 510 disposed on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 5) and an axis rotatably rotatable inside the base member 510. It mainly includes a supported first motorized workpiece 520 and a drive unit 530 for applying a driving force to the first motorized workpiece 520.

  The base member 510 is formed by fastening a front base 511 disposed on the front side and a back base 512 disposed at a predetermined distance from the front base 511.

  The front base 511 is formed of a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in a front view and a horizontal shape, and is formed of a transparent resin material. The front base 511 has a first projection 511a that protrudes to the back side from the upper end of the center in the left-right direction, a second projection 511b that protrudes to the back from the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and a second projection thereof. It is mainly provided with 511b and the 3rd projection part 511c which protrudes in the position which separated the predetermined gap in the horizontal direction.

  Also. The front base 511 is disposed at a position where the front can be viewed from the player side, and a pattern is formed on the front side by unevenness.

  The first projecting portion 511a is attached to the back surface base 512 when the first motorized component 520 described later is in a closed state (the tip of the wing members 520L, 520R is positioned on the upper portion of the rotation shaft (shaft member JB1)). It is a plate member for preventing the game ball from being thrown to the second winning opening 140 formed.

  That is, the first protrusion 511a is formed on the upper portion between the opposing wing members 520L and 520R in the closed state, and the distance between the first motorized part 520 and the first protrusion 511a is the diameter of the gaming ball It is set smaller than.

  Further, the first protrusion 511a is formed such that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the left and right ends. As a result, the gaming ball thrown to the upper portion of the first projecting portion 511a can be rolled (falling down) by rolling its upper surface.

  The second protrusion 511 b is formed to protrude in a horizontally long rectangular shape from the back side of the front base 511, and the position of the upper end face in the vertical direction is below the bottom of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. It is set. Further, the second protrusion 511b is a standing portion 511b1 erected in front of the second winning opening 140 of the back surface base 512, engaging portions 511b2 projecting from both left and right ends of the standing portion 511b1, and a bottom portion And a concave portion 511b3 which is provided in the concave portion.

  In addition, a base member 511f including an LED for emitting light to the lower side of the standing portion 511b1 is disposed in the second projecting portion 511b. The LEDs of the base member 511 f are arranged in a manner to emit light upward. Thus, the LED can emit light around the second winning opening 140.

  The standing portion 511b1 is formed standing upward from the upper end of the second projecting portion 511b, and is also provided side by side in two in the left-right direction, and the standing tips of the standing portions are connected. In addition, the standing portion 511b1 is formed such that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward toward the second winning opening 140 (rear side), and the vertical position of the end on the second winning opening 140 side is the second winning opening 140 The height is set to coincide with the bottom of the. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 can be rolled to the second winning opening 140 side. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511 b 1 can enter the second winning opening 140.

  Further, the connecting portion of the upright portions 511b1 arranged in parallel is formed in a shape in which the circumferential center position is recessed downward. As a result, it is possible to easily hold the game ball thrown to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 at the center position in the left-right direction of the standing portion 511b1. Therefore, it is possible to quickly switch the rolling direction of the gaming ball to be thrown to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 to the second winning opening 140 side. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 collides with the game ball to be sent later and is pushed out, and it is easy to make the game ball enter the second winning opening 140 it can.

  The engaging portion 511b2 is a portion engaged with left and right wing members 520L and 520R described later, and is formed so as to project from the left and right sides of the base end portion of the standing portion 511b1 toward the center of the pivot portion 511d described later.

  The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a driver when fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512. Thereby, a screw can be made to penetrate in penetration hole 511b4 by which penetration formation is carried out by the side by the side of the back of concave part 511b3.

  The third projecting portion 511 c is a plate member for rolling the gaming ball to the first out port 71 formed in the back surface base 512, and is formed in two places in the back surface base 512 across the second winning opening 140. It is formed adjacent to the left and right direction both outsides of the 1 out port 71. In other words, the third protrusion 511 c is formed at a position separated in the left-right direction by a dimension of the second protrusion 511 b and the first out port 71 in the left-right direction.

  The bottom surface of the third protrusion 511c is formed to be inclined downward toward the adjacent first out port 71 (toward the center side in the left-right direction of the front base 511 (left-right direction in FIG. 10A)). The lowermost position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first out port 71. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the 3rd projection part 511c can be rolled toward the 1st out mouth 71, and the 1st out mouth 71 can be made to enter a ball.

  The pivotal support portion 511d is formed so as to protrude annularly from the back side of the front base 511, and is formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10A) with the standing portion 511b1 interposed therebetween. . The inner diameter of the shaft support portion 511d is formed larger than the diameter of a shaft member JB1 described later. Thus, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted into the inside of the shaft support portion 511d.

  The back surface base 512 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body which is larger in front view shape than the front surface base 511 in front view. Thus, the player can directly view the front of the back base 512 at a portion not overlapping the front base 511 in the front-rear direction.

  Further, since the front base 511 is formed of a transparent material, the rear base 512 can be visually recognized through the front base 511 in a portion where the front base 511 overlaps the front. Further, the player can visually recognize the gaming ball, which is thrown between the back base 512 and the front base 511, through the front base 511.

  The back base 512 is formed next to the first winning opening 64 formed at the upper end on the front side, the second winning opening 140 formed below the first winning opening 64, and the second winning opening 140. And a general winning opening 63 formed on an upper portion of the first out port 71 on the right side of the front view.

  The first winning opening 64 is recessed downward from the upper end portion of the front base 511 in the substantially central position in the left-right direction (FIG. 10A left-right direction), and protrudes in both the front and back directions along the recessed edge It is formed. Further, the front end of the projecting end (the front side in the plane of FIG. 10A) is closed by the plate member.

  The concave shape of the first winning opening 64 is formed such that the inner side can be inserted into the gaming ball, and the bottom surface (inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed to be inclined to the back side. As a result, the gaming ball having entered the first winning opening 64 can be thrown to the back side of the gaming board 13.

  The second winning opening 140 is formed through the lower side of the first winning opening 64 in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 10A). The second winning opening 140 is formed in a square shape having a size larger than the diameter of the gaming ball in a front view. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 through the second winning opening 140. In addition, the second winning opening 140 has a recessed portion 140a recessed on the left and right inner side surfaces.

  The recess 140 a is curved and recessed about the axis of the shaft hole 512 a. Thereby, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R described later can be accommodated inside thereof. That is, inside the second winning opening 140, the game balls can be passed and the protrusions 523L and 523R are inserted.

  The axial holes 512 a are recessed from the front to the back on the left and right sides of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. The shaft hole 512a is a groove for inserting a shaft member JB1 described later into the inside, and is formed in a circular shape having a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

  The first out port 71 is formed to penetrate the left and right sides of the second winning port 140. The first out port 71 is a hole for collecting gaming balls having flowed down the gaming area formed on the front surface of the gaming board 13 and is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view and has a width in the vertical direction (short direction) The dimensions are set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Further, the bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) of the first out port 71 is formed to be inclined to the back side. Therefore, the gaming ball having entered the first out port 71 can be thrown to the back side of the gaming board 13.

  In the first out port 71, a guide wall 512b is formed which is connected to the bottom surface and protrudes to the front side. The guide wall 512b is a member for receiving the game ball having flowed down the game area on its upper surface and sending the ball to the first out port 71, and the upper surface is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side.

  Also, on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b, a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction are provided in parallel. Thereby, the rigidity of the guide wall 512b can be improved. As a result, when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area collides with the upper surface of the guiding wall 512b, it is possible to suppress the guiding wall 512b from being broken.

  Fastening between the front base 511 and the back base 512 is performed by the above-described through hole 511b4 and a fastening hole 512c formed through the back base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, with the front base 511 and the back base 512 combined in the front-rear direction, a driver is inserted from the lower side of the front base 511 into the recessed portion 511b3, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole 512c via the through hole 511b4. Can be done by

  The first motorized product 520 is formed as one unit of a left wing member 520L disposed on the left side in a front view of the second winning opening 140 and a right wing member 520R disposed on the right side in the front view.

  The left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are different only in the positions of the bulging portions 524L and 524R described later, and other members are formed symmetrically in the left and right with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween. Except for the projecting portions 524L and 524R, only the left wing member 520L is described, and the detailed description of the right wing member 520R is omitted.

  Further, the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are in a first state (closed state) in which a corner far from the through hole 521L is positioned upward in the direction of gravity by driving a solenoid 531 of a drive unit 530 described later. In the second state (open state) where the corner on the far side from the through hole 521L is displaced to a position separated outward in the left and right direction of the second winning opening 140, the first state is assumed unless specified otherwise. It shall be explained. Further, in the first state, the opposite side surfaces of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R will be described with the reference numerals of the side surfaces 526L and 526R.

  The left wing member 520L is formed in a substantially triangular shape in a front view, and is formed in a size larger than the diameter of the gaming ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the back and forth direction at the lower end in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and a back side from the vicinity of the through hole 521L A protrusion 523L protruding on the side, a recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the through hole 521L side, a bulged portion 524L protruding from the side surface 526L, and the inside of the through hole 521L And the shaft member JB1 to be inserted into the main body. A detailed description of the bulging portion 524L will be described later.

  The shaft member JB1 is a cylindrical rod member formed of a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is a shaft that rotatably holds the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 521L.

  The axial length of the shaft member JB1 is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly shorter than the distance from the recessed end surface of the shaft hole 512a to the rear surface side of the front base 511. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the back base 512, one end (end on the back base 512 side) of the shaft member JB1 is inserted into the inside of the shaft hole 512a, and the other end (end on the front base 511) The shaft member JB1 can be held between the front base 511 and the back base 512 by inserting the) into the inside of the pivot portion 511d.

  The dimension of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction is set smaller than the distance dimension between the facing of the front base 511 and the back base 512. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the back base 512, the wing member 520L can be rotatably held between the facing front base 511 and the back base 512 by inserting the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L. .

  The recess 522L is formed to be recessed from the front side around the axis of the through hole 521L, and the dimension of the recess is set to be smaller than the protrusion distance of the shaft support 511d. Further, the distance dimension from the axis of the through hole 521L of the recess 522L to the inner circumferential surface is set larger than the radial dimension of the axis of the shaft support portion 511d to the outer circumferential surface.

  Therefore, when the wing member 520L is disposed between the front base 511 and the back base 512, the ground of the front of the wing member 520L and the back face of the front base 511 can be suppressed, and the wing member 520L and the front face The ground contact portion with the base 511 can be made into the concave portion 522L and the pivotal support portion 511d. Therefore, grounding of the wing member 520L and the front base 511 can be partially made. As a result, when rotating the wing member 520L by driving a solenoid 531, which will be described later, the resistance acting on the wing member 520L can be reduced and the wing member 520L can be easily rotated.

  Further, since the bearing portion 511d can be accommodated inside the recess 522L, the distance dimension between the facing of the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be reduced. As a result, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the winning opening unit 500 can be reduced.

  Here, conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which the shaft member JB1 is internally fitted in the through hole 521L of the wing member 520L.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to fit the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L, when the wing member 520L is broken, it is necessary to replace the wing member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing parts. is there. Therefore, there is a problem that the cost of parts increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shaft member JB1 is only inserted into the through hole 521L formed in the wing member 520L, and the wing member 520L and the shaft member JB1 are separately provided to the winning opening unit 500. It can be arranged. Therefore, it is possible to use only the wing member 520L as a replacement part when the wing member 520L is broken. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in parts cost.

  Further, as described above, the fastening of the front base 511 to the back base 512 can be performed from the front side of the front base 511. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is broken, the front base 511 can be removed from the back base 512 in a state where the winning opening unit 500 is attached to the game board 13. As a result, it is possible to easily replace parts of the wing member 520L.

  That is, in the case of removing the front base 511 from the back side of the back base 512, it is necessary to remove the front base 511 from the back base 512 after removing the winning opening unit 500 from the game board 13. The front base 511 can be easily removed since it is formed so as to be removable from the side. As a result, it is possible to easily replace parts of the wing member 520L.

  Here, if the front base 511 can be removed from the front side of the back base 512, the head of a screw or the like fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be viewed from the player side (front side). By visually recognizing the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512, the interest of the player may be impaired.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fastening between the front base 511 and the back base 512 is performed using the space of the recessed portion 511 b 3 formed in the front base 511. That is, by inserting the driver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, a screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c via the through hole 511b4. Therefore, even in a state in which the front base 511 is located on the front side of the through hole 511b4, the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be fastened by inserting the driver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3. Therefore, the head of a screw or the like for fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be made less visible from the player side (front side). As a result, when the player visually recognizes the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  Also, normally, the decorative symbol display device 800 and the segment display device 600 visible through the opening formed in the central portion of the game board 13 are set at the height of the line of sight of the player. Therefore, the winning opening unit 500 is disposed below the player's eye level. As a result, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the player visually recognizes the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the front base 511 is formed of a transparent resin material, the head of the screw can be visually recognized through the front base 511, but as described above, the front base 511 also has irregularities on the front side. Since a pattern is formed, light can be emitted in the other direction due to the difference in thickness of the plate. Thereby, the head of the screw visible through the front base 511 can be blurred. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  Next, the drive unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. As shown in FIG. FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first motorized workpiece 520. FIG. 16 (a) and 16 (b) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first motor-operated part 520. FIG.

  FIGS. 15 (a) and 16 (a) show the first electric part 520 in the first state, and FIGS. 15 (b) and 16 (b) show the first electric part. The state where the accessory 520 is located in the second state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, a rotating member 533 thereof, and sliding. It is mainly provided with a first case member 534 in which the member 532 is displaceable inward and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534.

  The solenoid 531 includes an electric wire inside, and a main body portion 531a that generates an electromagnetic force when power is supplied to the electric wire, a movable body 531b slidably disposed inside the main body portion, and the movable body And an engaging portion 531c attached to the tip of the main body.

  The main body portion 531a is formed in a prismatic shape which is formed long in the front-rear direction, and an electric wire is disposed inside. On the front side of the main body portion 531a, a concave portion which is recessed on the back side is formed. Inside the concave portion, a movable body 531b formed in a cylindrical shape is disposed.

  The movable body 531b is formed of a metal material, and can be slid to the back side (the inner side of the main portion 531a) by applying electric power to the electric wire of the main portion 531a to generate an electromagnetic force.

  The engaging portion 531c is attached to the end of the movable body 531b opposite to the main portion 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed in a disk shape having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b, and the axis of the engaging portion 531c is disposed to be substantially colinear with the axis of the movable body 531b.

  The engaging portion 531c is inserted into an engaging groove 532a2 of a sliding member 532 described later. Thus, the sliding member 532 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 15A) in accordance with the displacement of the movable body 531b.

  The sliding member 532 is formed in a substantially E shape in a top view, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first members protruding from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a. It is mainly provided with a projection 532b and a second projection 532c which is located in the middle of the two first projections 532b and which is provided on the front side.

  The slide member 532 is formed such that the dimension in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 532a is smaller than the dimension in the left-right direction on the inner peripheral surface of the first case member 534 described later. Thereby, the sliding member 532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534.

  The connecting portion 532a is formed on the left and right sides of the concave portion 532a1 recessed on the back side, the engaging groove 532a2 connected to the front side of the concave portion 532a1 and recessed from the upper surface side, and the second protrusion 532c And the incised portion 532a3.

  As described above, the recess 532a1 is a recess that suppresses the contact of the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 with the connecting portion 532a when the engaging portion 531c of the solenoid 531 is inserted into the engaging groove 532a2. That is, the concave portion 532a1 is formed in an arc shape whose concave surface is larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. Thereby, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 can be suppressed from contacting the connecting portion 532a.

  The engaging groove 532a2 is formed to be connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the recessed depth in the direction of gravity from the upper surface side is set larger than the diameter of the engaging portion 531c. Further, the width dimension of the engagement groove 532a2 in the left-right direction is set larger than the diameter of the engagement portion 531c, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as or engaged with the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement portion 531c It is formed larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the portion 531c. Therefore, the engaging portion 531c can be inserted into the inside of the engaging groove 532a2.

  The cut portion 532a3 is a cut for facilitating elastic deformation of the sliding member 532 when connecting the first protrusion 532b described later to the rotating member 533, and as described above, the proximal end left and right of the second protrusion 532c It is formed on both sides and is cut toward the back side.

  The first protrusion 532b includes an engagement hole 532d formed to penetrate in the left-right direction. The engagement hole 532d is formed in a long hole shape long in the front and rear direction, and the first opening 532d1 recessed from the front end toward the lower side in the direction of gravity and the lower end from the end on the rear side It is mainly provided with a second opening 532d2 that is recessed. The detailed description of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be described later.

  In the engagement hole 532d, the width dimension in the vertical direction in the longitudinal central portion (portion other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is set larger than the width dimension in the vertical direction of the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 described later Be done. Thereby, the protrusion 533b can be disposed inside the engagement hole 532d.

  The second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b as described above, and is formed to protrude on the front side. In addition, the second protrusion 532c includes a standing wall 532c1 which is erected downward on the tip side opposite to the connecting portion 532a. The detailed description of the standing wall 532c1 will be described later.

  The rotating members 533 are formed by arranging two plate-like members formed substantially in an L shape in a side view with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and connecting the opposing ends on one end side by the connecting portion 533a. Ru. The gap between the two plate-like members of the rotating member 533 is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 533 (between the facing of the two plate-like members).

  Further, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotation member 533 (dimension between opposing sides of the outer surfaces of the two plate-like members) is set smaller than the dimension between opposing sides inside the two first protrusions 532 b of the sliding member 532 Ru. Thereby, the rotation member 533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532 b of the slide member 532 opposite to each other.

  The rotation member 533 has a rotation shaft 533c which protrudes to both sides in the left and right directions from a bent portion of an L shape in side view, a protrusion 533b which protrudes to both sides in the left and right directions from an end on one end side of the L shape in side view The drive unit 533d is mainly provided with a drive portion 533d which is formed to be recessed at the end on the other end side of the L-shape.

  The rotary shaft 533c is formed to project outward from the left and right sides of the rotation member 533, and the distance between the projecting end surfaces is set to be substantially the same as the width of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Further, the protruding dimension of the rotation shaft 533c is set larger than the thickness dimension in the left-right direction of the first case member 534. Thus, by receiving the rotation shaft 533c inside the recess 534a of the first case member 534 to be described later and assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534, the rotation member 533 can be made into the first case member 534 and the first case member 534. The two case members 535 can be held rotatably.

  The protrusions 533 b are formed to protrude on the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces is the distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532 b of the sliding member 532. It is set approximately the same as the dimensions. Further, the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 533b is set larger than the width dimension in the left-right direction of the first protrusion 532b. Therefore, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected by inserting the projection 533 b into the engagement hole 532 d of the first projection 532 b.

  The sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 may be connected by elastically deforming the two first protrusions 532 b of the sliding member 532 to the left and right to widen the facing between the two first protrusions 532 b. it can. In this case, as described above, since the incised portion 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532, it is possible to easily widen the facing between the two first protrusions 532b. As a result, the connection between the rotation member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, the distance dimension between the opposing inner surfaces in the left-right direction of the first case member 534 is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the first protrusions 532b, or the opposing surfaces of the outer surfaces of the first protrusions 532b It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension between the two. Thus, in the state where the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are disposed inside the first case member 534, it is possible to suppress the elastic deformation of the first protrusion 532b to the outside in the left-right direction. As a result, disconnection of the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be suppressed.

  The driving portion 533 d is formed to be recessed from the front side toward the back side. The driving portion 533d can accommodate the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing member 520L inside. That is, the drive portion 533d is set to a size larger in the vertical direction than the protrusions 523L and 523R. By accommodating the protrusions 523L and 523R in the drive unit 533d, the first motorized product 520 can be displaced in the first state and the second state according to the displacement of the drive unit 533d. A detailed description of the displacement of the first motorized product 520 will be described later.

  The first case member 534 is formed in a substantially square in a front view in which the inside is opened, and is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The lower side of the back surface side of the first case member 534 is formed by a notch, and the second case member 535 can be disposed in the cutout portion.

  The first case member 534 is mainly provided with a recess 534a recessed on the front side in a notch on the back side and a standing portion 534b standing on a bottom surface on the inner peripheral side.

  As described above, the recess 534a is a recess that accommodates the rotation shaft 533c of the rotation member 533 inside, and is recessed in a shape larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft 533c. Therefore, the rotary member 533 can be disposed inside the first case member 534 by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 in a state in which the rotary shaft 533 c is accommodated inside.

  The standing portion 534b has the lower inner peripheral surface of the second winning opening 140 of the rear surface base 512 and the standing front end surface thereof set to the same height, and is extended to the rear side and formed to be inclined downward. Be done. Thus, in a state where the drive unit 530 is disposed on the back surface of the back surface base 512, the gaming ball having entered the second winning opening 140 can be rolled on the top surface of the standing portion 534b and thrown to the second case member 535 .

  The second case member 535 has a rectangular shape in a front view and a rectangular shape, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness on the back side. The second case member 535 is provided with a through hole 535 a formed to penetrate in the vertical direction.

  The inner diameter of the through hole 535a is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball rolled on the upper portion of the standing portion 534b and thrown to the second case member 535 as described above is passed through the through hole 535a. It is possible to throw downward through As a result, it is possible to collect the gaming ball which has flowed down the gaming area and entered the second winning opening 140.

  Next, displacement of the first motor-operated workpiece 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 16 (a), in the state where the first motorized part 520 is positioned in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is disposed around the movable body 531b. It is projected on the front side (left side in FIG. 15A) by the biasing force of a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a.

  In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotation member 533 is located on the back side (the second opening 532d2 side) of the engagement hole 532d. Further, the position of the center of gravity in the side view of the rotation member 533 is located between the drive portion 533 d and the rotation shaft 533 c. That is, in the rotation member 533, a rotational force in a direction to push the drive portion 533d downward is always applied around the axis of the rotation shaft 533c.

  Therefore, even when the projection 533b of the rotation member 533 is positioned on the back side (the second opening 533d2 side) of the engagement hole 532d, the inner side of the second opening 533d2 (below the engagement hole 532d (FIG. ) Can be stagnant at the top without being guided down))).

  Further, since the drive portion 533d is pushed downward, the protrusions 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R housed inside the drive portion 533d are pushed downward. Thereby, the wing members 520L and 520R on the left and right sides are in a state (the first state (see FIG. 16A)) in which the corner portions on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are positioned above the through holes 521L and 521R. Ru.

  As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16B, when power is applied to the main body 531a of the solenoid 531, the movable body 531b is pulled into the main body 531a by the electromagnetic force generated in the main body 531a. Be

  Therefore, in accordance with the displacement of the movable body 531b, the sliding member 532 coupled to the front end side of the movable body 531b is slidingly displaced rearward (right side in FIG. 15B). As described above, the rotation member 533 is always in a state in which the rotation force in the direction of pushing the drive unit 533 d downward is always applied around the axis of the rotation shaft 533c. The protrusion 533 b housed inside is slid inside without being caught by the proximal end portion of the second opening 533 d 2.

  At the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, the projection 533b sliding on the inside of the second opening 533d2 abuts on the end of the engagement hole 532d on the front side (the first opening 532d1 side), and the back side (FIG. 15) (B) It is displaced to the right). In this case, since the protrusion 533b is rotationally displaced about the axis of the rotation shaft 533c, the protrusion 533b can be accommodated inside the first opening 532d1. That is, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

  Further, since the rotation member 533 rotates around the axis of the rotation shaft 533c, the drive portion 533d can be displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 15B). As a result, the wing member 520L is rotated about the axes of the through holes 521L and 521R, and the corner portions on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are displaced to the left and right (the second state (FIG. ))).

  On the other hand, the displacement from the second state to the first state is performed by interrupting the supply of power to the main body portion 531a of the solenoid 531. As a result, the electromagnetic force generated in the main body portion 531a disappears, and hence the biasing spring (not shown) is disposed around the movable body 531b and interposed between the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a. By the biasing force, the movable body 531b is projected to the front side (left side in FIG. 15A). As a result, the first motor-operated part 520 can be displaced to the position of the first state.

  As described above, since the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b, the depth of recess of the first opening 532d1 to the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 15B) is It is formed deeper toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 15 (b)).

  As a result, when displacing the first motorized part 520 from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 is caused to collide with the projection 533b of the rotating member 533 to move the projection 533b in the gravity direction. It can be easily displaced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the operation of the second protrusion 532c will be described. FIGS. 17A and 17B are cross-sectional views of the winning hole unit 500 taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. 10A. In FIG. 17A, the first motorized part 520 is positioned in the first state, and in FIG. 17B, the state in which the first motorized part 520 is positioned in the second state is illustrated. .

  As shown in FIG. 17A, when the first motorized product 520 is put into the first state, the far corner of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R is the first protrusion 511a. It is placed in the vicinity. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down between the opposing wing members 520L and 520R in the first state in which the first motorized prize 520 is in the first state.

  In addition, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531 b protrudes from the inside of the main body portion 531 a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (the engaging portion 531c) is positioned on the front side (left side in FIG. 17A). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is disposed in the vicinity of the second winning opening 140.

  In this case, the distance from the front end of the standing wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower end in FIG. 17A)) to the upper end face of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 L1 is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  As a result, even when the first motorized product 520 is broken and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected forward, the game ball can be made to flow between the left and right wing members 520L and 520R. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 and rolling. That is, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 can be caused to collide with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532 to stop the rolling of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the store side is disadvantageous even if the player continues to play the game when the first motorized role product 520 is damaged.

  In the present embodiment, a sensor device SE1 that detects that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 140 is disposed in the flow path of the game ball of the second case member 535. Therefore, in order to detect that the gaming ball has passed through the inside of the second winning opening 140, it is necessary to roll the gaming ball to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the gaming ball inside the first case member 534, it can be suppressed that the pachinko machine 10 detects that the gaming ball has entered the second winning opening 140.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), when the first motorized accessory 520 is put into the second state, the far corner portions of the through holes 521L, 521R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are from the first state. Also, the distance from the first protrusion 511a is greater than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the game area can be received by the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, and can be rolled to the second winning opening 140. That is, when the first motorized role object 520 is put into the second state, it is easy to make the game ball enter the second winning opening 140.

  In addition, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b is drawn inside the main body portion 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (the engaging portion 531c) is positioned on the back side (right side in FIG. 17B). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is disposed at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

  In this case, the distance from the front end of the standing wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower end in FIG. 17B)) to the upper end face of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 L2 is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  As a result, when the first motorized product 520 is put in the second state, the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are displaced so that the game balls flowing down the game area can easily enter the second winning opening 140. In addition to being able to, the game ball entered into the second winning opening 140 can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534.

  Further, since the vertical wall 532c1 can be slide-displaced in such a direction that the displacement direction of the vertical wall 532c1 substantially coincides with the rolling direction of the gaming ball entering the second winning opening 140, the wing member 520L, When the 520R is broken (or cheated) and opened, the gaming ball which is made to collide with the standing wall 532c1 and stopped is pushed out in the opposite direction to the rolling direction by the displacement of the standing wall 532c1 Can be suppressed. Thus, when the first motorized product 520 is opened by driving the solenoid 531 and the game ball can be inserted into the second winning opening 140, the game ball is prevented from being clogged by the second winning opening 140. it can. As a result, when the first motorized product 520 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be smoothly guided to the inside of the second winning opening.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the case where the first motorized product 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state due to the player's fraud will be described. FIGS. 18A and 18B are front views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 19 (a) and 19 (b) are side views of the first motor-driven workpiece 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG.

  In FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b), the front base 511 is viewed as transparent for ease of understanding. Also, in FIG. 19A, the first motorized product 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state are illustrated, and in FIG. 19B, only the first motorized product 520 is displaced from the first state. The state of is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when the first motorized symbol 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state only by the first motorized symbol 520 due to the player's fraudulent act (Goto act). In this case, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are displaced to the inside of the second opening 532d2 of the engagement hole 532d. That is, since the space in which the protrusions 523L and 523R can be displaced is formed, it is possible to suppress the breakage of the first motorized component 520 when the first motorized component 520 is forcibly displaced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 20A and 11B, displacement of the standing portion 523c1 when the first motorized product 520 is displaced due to a player's fraud will be described. FIG. 20A is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along line XXa-XXa of FIG. 18A, and FIG. 20B is a winning opening unit 500 taken along line XXb-XXb of FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), when the first motorized object 520 in the first state is forcedly rotated by the player's urging action, the solenoid of the drive unit 530 is turned on. The positions of 531 and the sliding member 532 are not displaced, and only the first motor component 520 and the rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

  As described above, when the first motor-operated part 520 is positioned in the first state, the first mounted part 532c1 is installed from the front end (the end of the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower part in FIG. 20A)) The distance dimension L1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in the one case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  Here, conventionally, the second winning opening 140 in which the game ball is formed so as to be able to enter the ball, a pair of wing members 520L and 520R disposed with the second winning hole 140 interposed therebetween, and the pair of wing members When the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is opened by the driving means (solenoid 531) for applying driving force to the 520L, 520R to open or close and the driving means (solenoid 531), the second winning opening 140 When the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is closed by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), the game ball is placed in the second winning hole 140 when the game ball is disposed at the allowable position which allows the ball to enter the ball. There is known a gaming machine provided with a regulation means disposed at a regulation position for regulating a ball.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, for example, after forcibly opening the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from the outside, the restricting means is displaced from the restricting position to the allowable position. To prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 improperly.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement of the standing wall 532c1 is maintained at the restricted position in a state in which the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is closed or in a state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is opened from the outside Since it can be formed, displacement of the standing wall 532c1 to the allowable position can be suppressed. Therefore, it can be easily controlled that the game ball is illegally entered into the second winning opening 140.

  That is, in the state in which the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or in the state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated to The distance L3 from the lower side (the end of the lower side in FIG. 20B) to the upper end face of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball . Therefore, even if the first electric character 520 is capable of sending the game ball to the second winning opening 140 due to the player's fraudulent action, the game ball enters the second winning hole 140 and rolls. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 can be caused to collide with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532 to stop the rolling of the game ball. As a result, when the first electric character 520 is put into the second state (the game ball can be thrown to the second winning opening 140) by the player's fraudulent action, the gaming ball is illegally sent to the second winning opening 140. It can be easy to regulate being thrown.

  Further, in this case, the standing wall 532c1 for making the gaming ball unable to enter the second winning opening 140 can be formed continuously to the sliding member 532 for displacing the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. There is no need for a separate member that restricts unauthorized entry into the winning opening 140. Accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, when the first motorized product 520 is put into the second state due to the player's fraudulent behavior, the case where the second projection 532c is further pushed back will be described. . 21 (a) and 21 (b) are side views of the first motor-driven workpiece 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 22 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIa of FIG. 21 (a), and FIG. 22 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIb of FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, a projection 532d3 is formed on the inner side of the second opening 532d2 so as to project from the inner surface on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A). Further, in the protrusion 533b of the rotation member 533, a notch 533b1 formed by cutting the outer peripheral surface in a side view is formed.

  The protrusion 532 d 3 and the notch 533 b 1 are formed in a shape corresponding to the outer diameter thereof. That is, the protrusion shape of the protrusion 532 d 3 in the side view and the cut shape of the notch 533 b 1 are substantially the same.

  Accordingly, from the state in which only the first motorized product 520 is set to the second state due to fraudulent action shown in FIGS. 21A and 22A, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed to the back side The protrusion 532d3 is accommodated inside the cutout 533b1, and the displacement of the vertical wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is restricted toward the back side. As a result, when the first electric character 520 is put into the second state by the player's fraudulent action, the gaming ball is inserted into the second winning opening 140, and the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is formed. Can be suppressed from being rolled and thrown.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one of the side surfaces of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined upward to the back side (see FIG. 22A). Thus, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted into the inside of the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be prevented from easily coming out of the notch 533b1.

  That is, since the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined to the back side toward the upper side, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is further formed on the back side with the protrusion 532d3 inserted in the notch 532b1. The direction of the force acting on the contact surface between the protrusion 532 d 3 and the notch 532 b 1 when the force to push in acts on the protrusion 532 d 3 can be the direction in which the protrusion 532 d 3 enters the inside of the notch 532 b 1. Therefore, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to slip out of the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first motorized role 520 is put into the second state by the player's fraudulent action, the gaming ball enters the second winning opening 140 and the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is It can be reliably suppressed that it rolls and is thrown.

  In other words, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is provided, and the transmission mechanism is in the open slide position (FIG. The slide member 532 is slidingly displaced between the position shown in b) and the closed slide position (the position shown in FIG. 17A), and the open rotation is caused by the slide displacement to the open slide position of the slide member 532 A rotary member 533 which is rotated to the position to open the pair of wing members 520L, 520R and is rotated to the closed rotational position by the slide displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closed slide position to close the pair of wing members 520L, 520R , And the standing wall 532c1 is disposed on the sliding member 532 and stands up when the sliding member 532 is slid to the open slide position. The wall 532c1 is disposed in the allowable position, and when the sliding member 532 is slid to the closed sliding position, the upright wall 532c1 is disposed in the restricted position, and the sliding member 532 is disposed in the closed sliding position. When the rotation member 533 is placed in the open rotation position, the slide member 532 is engaged with the slide member 532 to restrict the slide displacement of the slide member 532 to the open slide position. It can be made easy to control that a ball is illegally entered into the second winning opening 140.

  That is, when the closed pair of wing members 520L and 520R is forcibly released from the outside, the rotating member 533 is rotated to the open rotation position with the sliding member 532 in the closing slide position. Be done. In this state, the sliding member 532 is engaged with the sliding member 532 to restrict the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position, so that the regulating means can be maintained at the regulating position (regulating means Can be suppressed from being forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, even if a game ball is allowed to pass from between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R after forcibly opening the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from the outside, such game balls enter the second winning opening 140 The ball can be regulated by the regulation means.

  Further, the engagement hole 532d is extended to one of the sliding member 532 and the rotation member 533 and the projection 533b is protruded from the other, and the projection 533b is slid along the engagement hole 532d. The sliding displacement of the member 532 is transmitted to rotate the rotating member 533, and the projection 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, whereby the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position is restricted. Therefore, it is difficult to release the regulation while achieving downsizing.

  That is, means for restricting the slide displacement to the open slide position of the slide member 532 by using the engagement hole 532 d and the protrusion 533 b for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide member 532 to the rotation member 533 for rotation Since it can be formed and it becomes unnecessary to separately provide such a means in another place, the size can be reduced accordingly. In addition, by making the projection 533b engage with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the engagement portion from the outside difficult, and the restriction (engagement) is released by that amount. It can be difficult.

  Then, with reference to FIG.23 and FIG.24, the bulging part 524L, 524R of wing member 520L, 520R on either side is demonstrated in detail. Fig.23 (a) is a front perspective view of left wing member 520L, FIG.23 (b) is a front perspective view of right wing member 520R. FIG. 24 (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 24 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 24 (a).

  In FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), the left and right directions in oblique view are reversed between FIG. 23 (a) and FIG. 23 (b). Further, in FIG. 24A, the front base 511 is viewed as transparent and illustrated. Further, in FIG. 24B, the front base 511 viewed as transparent in FIG. 24A is illustrated as being opaque. Further, in FIG. 24B, the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the sign of the imaginary line KS1. Furthermore, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by the arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by the arrow B.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portion 524L formed on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end portion on the through hole 521L side, and the front side (arrow F in FIG. It forms in connection with the end face of the side). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R formed on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is formed at the end on the through hole 521R side and is formed continuously with the end face on the back side (arrow B side in FIG. 24 (b)). Be done.

  That is, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 24B).

  Furthermore, in the side surfaces 526L and 526R, a first area continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R is formed, and the first area is not in contact with the gaming ball guided The bulged portions 524L, 524R are formed, and the first region and the other wing of the side surfaces 526L, 526R in one wing member (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R The first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) are arranged along the side surfaces 526L and 526R at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming ball is guided. Ru.

  In the bulging portion 524L, the end on the far side from the through hole 521L is inclined toward the through hole 521L from the front side (the lower side in FIG. 24B) to the back side (the upper side in FIG. 24B) It is formed. On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R is formed such that an end portion on the far side from the through hole 521R is inclined toward the through hole 521R side from the back side to the front side.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the case where the game balls are thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R will be described. 25 (a) and 25 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 26 (a) and 26 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

  25 (a), 25 (b), 26 (a) and 26 (b) correspond to the sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in FIG. 24 (b). Moreover, in FIG. 25 (a) and FIG. 25 (b), the transition state of the game ball at the time of the game ball having been thrown from both sides of the 1st motorized goods 520 is illustrated in order. In FIGS. 26A and 26B, the transition state of the gaming ball when the gaming ball is thrown only to the left wing member 520L is sequentially illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), when game balls are thrown on both sides of the first motorized product 520, the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are rolled. The game balls can be rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction by the bulging portions 524L, 524R.

  Describing in detail, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed by being connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, the gaming ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls on the back surface side by rolling the side surface 526L while in contact with the bulging portion 524L.

  In this case, in the bulging portion 524L, the end on the far side from the through hole 521L is from the front side (the lower side in FIG. 25B) to the back side (the upper side in FIG. 25B) Since it is formed to be inclined, when the gaming ball rolling on the side surface 526L comes into contact with the bulging portion 524L, it is possible to suppress that the resistance in the rolling direction becomes large and the rolling of the gaming ball is stopped.

  On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R is formed by being connected to the end face on the back side. Therefore, the gaming ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R rolls on the front side by rolling the side surface 526R while being in contact with the bulging portion 524R.

  In this case, in the bulging portion 524R, the end on the far side from the through hole 521R is from the back side (the upper side in FIG. 25B) to the front side (the lower side in FIG. 25B) Since it is formed to be inclined, when the gaming ball rolling on the side surface 526R contacts the bulging portion 524R, it is possible to suppress the resistance in the rolling direction becoming large and the rolling of the gaming ball being stopped.

  Therefore, while the game ball rolling on the left wing member 520L side can be brought close to the back side, the game ball rolling on the right wing member 520R side can be put on the front side. As a result, when the game balls are thrown from the left and right sides, it is possible to suppress the frontal collision of the game balls thrown from the left and right.

  Here, conventionally, there is a ball entry port (second winning port 140) in which game balls are formed so as to be able to enter the ball, and a guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) for guiding the game balls to the ball entry port and displacement. A gaming machine is known that is equipped with a guide member (the first motorized product 520) formed as possible. The guide members include, for example, a pair of wing members (feather members 520L, 520R) having a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and disposed so as to sandwich the ball entrance and the proximal end is rotatably supported. Is illustrated.

  Further, a first groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one of the wing members (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) and the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of the other wing member. A technique is disclosed in which second grooves are respectively provided on the entire surface of According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) on one of the wing members (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) And even if the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L and 526R) on one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R), the game balls are directed in different directions ( One can be biased to the glass plate side and the other to the game board side). Therefore, these game balls can be smoothly entered into the second winning opening 140.

  However, the above-described prior art has a problem that the gaming ball can not be biased sufficiently. Also, the game ball entering from one side of the guide member (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) passes through the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) and the other side of the guide member (the wing members 520L, 520R) On the other hand, there is a problem that the amusement of the player is lost because the game ball is not entered into the entrance (the second winning opening 140) in this case.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first motorized product 520 is a pair of bulging portions formed so as to be able to abut on the game balls protruding from the side surfaces 526L, 526R and rolling the side surfaces 526L, 526R. The side surfaces 526L, 526R are provided with 524L, 524R, and the pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R. The game ball can be reliably biased by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball entrance.

  Further, the pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, thereby making the pair of wing members 520L, 520R The game ball entered from one side can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R. Therefore, the game ball entering from one side of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) passes through the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (to either of the wing members 520L, 520R) Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance to improve the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, the first motorized product 520 is formed as a pair of wing members 520L, 520R disposed with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween and rotatably supported at the base end side, and the pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R Are protrudingly provided from the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, and the bulging portions 524L and 524R and the other wing member in one of the wing members 520L and 520R of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R in 520L and 520R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are guided ( By bringing the game ball to be moved into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R, such a game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning opening 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, the directions in which the game balls are guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R (the feathers 524L and 524R in one feather member 520L and 520R and the bulges 524L and 524R in the other feather members 520L and 520R) The game balls having entered one of the wing members 520L, 520R at the side face 526L, 526R are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the members 520L, 520R). When the side surfaces 5.26L and 526R of the wing members 520L and 520R are reached, the gaming ball can be brought into contact with the bulged portions 524L and 524R of the other wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached into side 526L, 526R in one wing member 520L, 520R passes through side 526L, 526R in the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the second winning opening 140 and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In other words, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed at different positions in the front and rear direction on the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, respectively, the gaming balls rolled from the left and right are turned to different positions in the front and rear direction. It can be moved. Therefore, when the game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to suppress the front collision of the game balls which are thrown from the left and right. As a result, it can be suppressed that it takes time for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140 into the ball.

  That is, by setting the colliding positions of the gaming balls to different positions in the left and right direction in the left and right direction, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the gaming balls on the left side moved closer to the rear side 25 (b) upper side). On the other hand, the game ball on the right side brought closer to the front side is likely to bounce back to the front side (the lower side in FIG. 25B) due to the collision.

  Therefore, it is easy to make one game ball (in the present embodiment, the left wing member 520L rolls) enter the second winning opening 140, and the other game ball is repelled to the front side, thereby causing a collision. When it does, it can control that game sphere separates from 2nd winning a prize mouth 140 too much. Therefore, it is possible to accelerate the entry of the second game ball entering the second winning opening 140 into the second winning opening 140 later. As a result, when the game balls are thrown on both the left and right sides of the first electric character 520, the time taken for the game balls on both sides to enter the second winning opening 140 can be shortened, and the game progress smoothly. You can go ahead.

  Further, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are protruded from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at a position closer to the base end side (the through hole 521 side) than the tip sides of the wing members 520L and 520R, they are guided to the side surfaces 526L and 526R. It is possible to secure a rollable area by which the game ball to be played comes into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R. Therefore, the fall of the rolling speed of a game ball can be suppressed by that part, and the second winning opening 140 can be smoothly entered.

  Further, the bulged portions 524L, 524R are protruded from the side surfaces 526L, 526R at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, so that they are abutted against the bulged portions 524L, 524R and biased. It is possible to prevent the course of the game ball from returning to the pre-bias course before reaching the front of the ball entrance (end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the gaming balls from the side surfaces 526L, 526R to the ball entrance while keeping the biased state.

  Further, as described above, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are formed with the first region continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, and are not in contact with the gaming ball guided in the first region Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed to have the following sizes, when the game balls entering the side surfaces 526L and 526R roll the first area, the rolling speed of the game balls is reduced. This can be avoided, and the second winning opening 140 can be smoothly entered.

  In this case, the first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of one of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) and the other wing member (wing members 520L and 520R) And the first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, so that one wing member The game ball simultaneously guides the first regions of the side regions 526L, 526R in the members 520L, 520R) and the first regions of the side surfaces 526L, 526R in the other wing members (the other one of the wing members 520L, 520R) Even in the case of (rolling), the respective game balls can be biased in mutually different directions, and the second winning opening 14 It can be ball entrance smoothly to.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), when the game ball is thrown to one of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, the other left and right wing members 520L and 520R are used. The game ball is prevented from rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other left and right wing members 520L and 520R and falling from the tip by bringing the game ball into contact with the bulging part 524L or the bulging part 524R of it can.

  Describing in detail, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed by being connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, the gaming ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls on the back surface side by rolling the side surface 526L while in contact with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, the gaming ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L can be brought closer to the bulging portion 524R side formed on the right wing member 520R.

  In other words, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, either one of the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R is The game ball rolling to the winning opening side can be rolled (placed) in a position coincident with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on either the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction .

  Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball is rolled to the back side (closely placed) and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R. It can be positioned. On the other hand, when the game ball rolls the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball is rolled to the front side (closely placed) and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L. It can be positioned.

  Thereby, when the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on either side 526L or side 526R is fast, the game ball rides on the side 526L, 526R of the other left wing member 520L or right wing member 520R. It can be suppressed.

  Here, in the conventional winning opening unit 500, since the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the first motorized product 520 are formed to be smooth surfaces, the game ball sent from one of the first motorized product 520 is the other. There is a problem that the wing members 520L and 520R ride on and are thrown from the tip of the other wing members 520L and 520R to the flow-down area.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction in the first motorized product 520, the gaming ball rolled from one of the wing members is obtained. It can be made to roll to the position substantially corresponding to bulging part 524L, 524R formed in the other wing member in the direction of order. Therefore, by causing the game ball rolling one wing member 520L, 520R to collide with the bulging portion 524L, 524R of the other wing member 520L, 520R, the game ball is the side surface 526L of the other wing member 520L, 520R. It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown onto the game area from the tips of the wing members 520L and 520R by riding on the 526R.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, the recess 525L and the engaging portion 511b2 will be described. FIG. 27 (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 27 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a). FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning hole unit 500 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 27 (b). Note that FIG. 28 (a) shows the first motorized product 520 in the first state, and FIG. 28 (b) shows the first motorized product 520 in the second state.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the engaging portions 511b2 formed on the second projecting portions 511b of the front base 511 are disposed inside the recessed portions 525L and 525R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, respectively. .

  Further, in the first state, a state in which the engaging portion 511b2 and the end portion on the bulging portion 524L, 524R (side surface 526L, 526R) side of the recessed portion 525L, 525R abut (see FIG. 28A). In the second state, the engaging portion 511b2 is in contact with the end of the recessed portion 525L, 525R opposite to the bulging portion 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R).

  That is, when the first motorized part 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 is in contact with the end portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R. Thus, the amount of displacement can be regulated.

  Furthermore, in the first state, the rotational force acting around the axes of the through holes 521L, 521R is due to its own weight, and the corner far from the through holes 521L, 521R of the wing members 520L, 520R is toward the second winning opening 140 side. It is considered to be the direction of rotation. Therefore, the wing members 520L and 520R are rotated by their own weight by the engagement between the engaging portion 511b2 and the end of the recessed portions 525L and 525R on the side of the expanded portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) Can be suppressed, and the wing members 520L and 520R can be held in the first state.

  Further, in the first state, the end portions on the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side of the recessed portions 525L, 525R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2, so the bulging portions of the wing members 520L, 520R The side surfaces of 524L and 524R can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. Thus, the rigidity of the contact portion can be increased by the amount of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, and therefore, the wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from being damaged by coming into contact with the engaging portion 511b2.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the base member 510 rotatably supporting the wing members 520L, 520R is provided, and the base member 510 contacts the wing members 520L, 520R to rotate the wing members 520L, 520R. Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the wing members 520L and 520R are in contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. That is, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are portions protruding from the wing members 520L and 520R (the side surfaces 526L and 526R), portions of the wing members 520L and 520R where the rigidity is relatively high correspond to those of the base member 510. Since it can utilize as a stopper made to contact the engaging part 511b2, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed by that amount.

  Furthermore, the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R are substantially flush with the side surfaces on the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, and in the closed state, the side surfaces on the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R Since the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed in one are at least in contact with the engaging portions 511b2 of the base member 510, the portions (bulging portions 524L) far from the rotation shaft (through holes 521L and 521R) , 524R can be made to abut on the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the reaction force input from the engaging portion 511b2 to the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. Further, for example, the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 is separated from the second winning opening 140, as compared with the case where the protruding end surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. It is possible to secure a space as a flow path to the second winning opening 140. In addition to the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the side surfaces on the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R may also be in contact with the engaging portions 511b2 of the base member 510. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced to further suppress breakage of the wing members 520L and 520R.

  In a state in which the wing members 520L and 520R are closed, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are disposed below the standing portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511 (downward in FIG. 28A). In other words, the standing portion 511b1 is disposed between the opposing portions of the bulging portions 524L and 524R.

  Here, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are disposed at positions where the facing distance between the side faces 526L and 526R in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball so as not to sandwich the gaming ball. In this case, when the bulging portions 524L, 524R are protruded from the side surfaces 526L, 526R, the protruding height of the bulging portions 524L, 524R is set so as not to hold the game ball between the bulging portions 524L, 524R. The pair of wing members 520L, 520R needs to be further spaced apart, which increases the space necessary for arranging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R includes the erected portions 511b1 positioned between the bulged portions 524L and 524R in the closed state, and the bulged portions 524L are viewed in the rotational axis direction. The opposing distance between the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the region where 524R is not formed is made larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the opposing distance between the bulging portions 524L and 524R is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, The space required for the arrangement of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced.

  That is, in the state where the gaming balls are guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L, 526R, even if the pair of wing members 520L, 520R starts to close (even if the transition to the closed state is started), the bulging portions 524L, Since the standing portion 511b1 is positioned between the opposing 524Rs, it is possible to discharge the gaming ball from the opposing between the bulging portions 524L and 524R and to prevent the gaming ball from being caught between the bulging portions 524L and 524R. . The gaming ball discharged from the facing between the bulging parts 524L, 524R by the standing part 511b1 is located between the facings of the side faces 526L, 526R in the area where the bulging parts 524L, 524R are not formed, Since the facing interval at such a position is made larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, the gaming ball will not be caught (see FIG. 27A). As a result, the facing distance between the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thereby, the space required for arrangement of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be disposed in a space equivalent to the space necessary for the arrangement of the conventional product in which the bulging portions 524L and 524R are not provided on the side surfaces 526L and 526R.

  On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 521L 521R is such that the corner far from the through holes 521L, 521R of the wing members 520L, 520R rotates downward in the direction of gravity by its own weight. Be done. Therefore, the wing members 520L and 520R are self-weighted by the abutment between the engaging portion 511b2 and the end of the recessed portion 525L or 525R opposite to the bulging portion 524L or 524R (side surface 526L or 526R) side. While being able to suppress rotation, wing members 520L and 520R can be held in the second state.

  Accordingly, since the displacement of the wing members 520L and 520R can be restricted at locations other than the drive portion 533d and the protrusions 523L and 523R described above, breakage of the drive portion 533d and the protrusions 523L and 523R can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to miniaturize the rotation member 533 because it is not necessary to form a large part in order to increase the rigidity of the rotation member 533. As a result, the drive unit 530 can be miniaturized.

  In the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is located lower in the direction of gravity than the lower ends of the side surfaces 526L, 526R and is located higher in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the second winning opening 140, so the side surface 526L, The game ball guided to the 526R can be thrown on the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, and can be made to enter the second winning opening 140 by rolling the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 (FIG. 28 (b )reference).

  Furthermore, as described above, the base member 511f including the LED for emitting light to the wing members 520L and 520R (the second winning opening 140 side) is disposed in the second protrusion 511b. As shown in FIG. 28A, in the first state, the recessed portions 525L and 525R are positioned on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the light irradiated from the LED of the base member 511f can be easily made to enter the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R.

  That is, it is possible to suppress that the light of the LED is reflected to the outer surface of the wing members 520L, 520R by irradiating the light of the LED to the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L, 525R. As a result, light can be easily made to enter the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R to the player can be increased. As a result, even in the state through the front base 511 formed of the amount of transparent material, it is possible to make the feather members 520L and 520R easily visible to the player.

  When the wing members 520L and 520R are brought into the second state shown in FIG. 28 (b), the recessed portions 525L and 525R are at substantially the same positions in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R. . Therefore, it can be made easy to irradiate the game ball sent to the front side of the 2nd prize-winning opening 140 by LED of the base member 511f.

  That is, by setting the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R at substantially the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R, the gap between the facings of the first motorized product 520 can be increased. . Therefore, it can be made easy to irradiate the game ball sent to the front side of the 2nd winning a prize mouth with LED of substrate member 511f. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily view the gaming ball entered in the second winning opening 140 even in the state of being through the front base 511 formed of the transparent material.

  Then, with reference to FIG. 29, the arrangement aspect to the game board 13 of the winning a prize mouth unit 500 is demonstrated. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the range XXIX of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the winning opening unit 500 is disposed at a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76. As shown in FIG.

  Inside the lower end portion of the inner rail 76, a first out port 71 for collecting gaming balls flowing down the conventional gaming area is formed. Therefore, the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 is formed with a curved portion 76 a curved at a curvature larger than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 in order to make it easy to collect the gaming balls.

  Therefore, the gap between the winning opening unit 500 and the inner rail 76 is increased at the lower end portion (portion where the curved portion 76 a is formed) of the inner reel. As described above, the fastening of the front base 511 and the back base 512 of the winning opening unit 500 is performed by inserting a driver or the like obliquely from below the front base 511 into the recessed portion 511b3.

  The through hole 511 b 4 is formed in a second projecting portion 511 b formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the front base 511. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 can be positioned above the curved portion 76a (upper side in FIG. 29). Therefore, when inserting a driver or the like obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, the gap with the winning opening unit 500 formed by the curved portion 76a can be used, so the front base from the front side of the game board 13 511 can be easily attached to and detached from the back base 512.

  In addition, since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the inside of the recessed portion 511b3 by the inner rail 76, the player's interest is reduced by visually recognizing a screw or the like fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36, the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described.

  First, the configuration of the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. Fig.30 (a) is a front view of the decorative symbol display apparatus 800, FIG.30 (b) is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display apparatus 800 in the XXXb-XXXb line | wire of Fig.30 (a). FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative symbol display device 800, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative symbol display device 800. As shown in FIG. FIG. 33 (a) is a front view in which the inner reel 811 is expanded, and FIG. 33 (b) is a front view in which the outer reel 821 is expanded.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the decorative symbol display device 800 includes an inner reel unit 810 configured to be rotatable, an outer reel unit 820 for accommodating a part of the inner reel unit 810, and an inner reel unit 810. And the receiving unit 880 for receiving the outer reel unit 820 inside, the drive motor KM1 attached to the receiving unit 880 and driving the inner reel unit 810 to rotate, and the receiving unit 880 attached to the outer reel unit 820. A drive motor KM2 for rotating and driving, and a backlight unit 830 disposed inside the inner reel unit 810 are mainly provided.

  The inner reel unit 810 includes a substantially cylindrical inner reel 811 penetrating left and right, a rotating member 812 disposed on one end side (left side in FIG. 30A) of the opening of the inner reel 811, and an inner reel 811. An annular member 813 disposed on the other end side (right side in FIG. 30A) of the opening is formed.

  The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a belt-like sheet formed of a transparent resin along the circumferential direction. As the inner reel 811 is shown to Fig.33 (a), a decoration pattern is arranged at equal intervals by making a longitudinal direction vertical. The inner reels 811 of the three decorative symbol display devices 800 juxtaposed to each other are different in arrangement of the decorative symbols.

  The rotating member 812 connects a hub 812a formed in a substantially disc shape, a rim 812b formed in a substantially annular shape larger than the hub 812a, and an outer peripheral surface of the hub 812a and an inner peripheral surface of the rim 812b. And spokes 812 c are mainly provided.

  The hub 812a and the rim 812b are arranged in axially different positions, with their axes formed in the same straight line. Thus, the spokes 812 c are formed to be axially inclined toward the radially outer side of the hub 812 a.

  The rim 812 b is a portion to which one end side of the inner reel 811 is attached on the outer peripheral surface, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner reel 811. In other words, the circumferential distance dimension at the outer peripheral portion of the rim 812 b is set to be substantially the same as the longitudinal dimension of the expanded inner reel 811. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be disposed (pasted) on the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b without a gap.

  The hub 812 a is disposed inside the inner reel 811. That is, the spokes 812 c connecting the hub 812 a and the rim 812 b are inclined toward the other end (the annular member 813 described later) of the opening of the inner reel 811 as it goes radially inward. Thus, the hub 812 a can be disposed inside the inner reel 811. In addition, the spokes 812c are formed of a plurality of rod-shaped members extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a, and include an inner opening 812c1 opening between the circumferentially adjacent spokes 812c.

  The hub 812 a has a position in the axial direction substantially the same as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. Thereby, the space by the side of annular ring member 813 can be secured rather than hub 812a. Connected to the hub 812 a is a drive motor KM 1 for applying a rotational drive force to the inner reel unit 810.

  The thickness dimension of the drive motor KM1 in the axial direction of the inner reel 811 is approximately half that of the inner reel 811. As described above, the hub 812a has an axial position substantially the same as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction, and the inner portion of the inner reel 811 on the other end (ring member 813) side. Since a space is formed, most of the drive motor KM1 can be disposed inside the inner reel 811. As a result, the dimensions of the inner reel unit 810 and the drive motor KM1 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be reduced.

  Further, in the drive motor KM1, the rotation axis is disposed in a straight line coaxial with the axis of the hub 812a. That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor KM1. As described above, since the axis of the hub 812a and the axis of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, the rotation of the drive motor KM1 can rotate the inner reel 811 around the axis of the inner reel 811. As a result, the symbol decorated on the inner reel 811 can be viewed by the player as an aspect of being vertically displaced.

  The annular member 813 is formed in an annular shape having an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the rim 812 b. The inner peripheral surface of the other end side (right side in FIG. 30A) of the opening of the inner reel 811 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the annular member 813.

  Here, since the inner reel 811 is formed of a sheet of transparent resin as described above, its rigidity is relatively low. Therefore, if the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it may be deformed by the centrifugal force of the rotation, wind pressure, or the like, and the player may not be able to correctly recognize the symbol decorated around it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inner reel 811 is connected to the rim 812b of the rotating member 812 at one end and connected to the annular member 813 at the other end, so the inner reel unit 810 is rotated. At the time, it becomes difficult to displace by the centrifugal force and wind pressure. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it is possible to make the player correctly recognize the symbol decorated around the inner reel 811.

  Further, since the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet, the load on the inner reel 811 can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor KM1 can be reduced when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally driven. As a result, the rotational start of the inner reel unit 810 can be made smooth.

  The outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape, a hub 823 formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than that of the outer reel 821, and one end side of the opening of the outer reel 821 (FIG. ) And the spokes 822 connecting the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 are mainly formed.

  The outer reel 821 is formed such that the inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the inner reel 811, and the width dimension in the axial direction is formed larger than the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. Further, the inner reel 811 is formed of a transparent resin material and formed to have a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. A symbol is decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811. A description of the decoration will be described later.

  The hub 823 is disposed coaxially with the outer reel 821 and has an axial substantially central position of the outer reel 821. Further, to the hub 823, a drive motor KM2 for applying a rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820 is connected.

  The spokes 822 are formed to be inclined in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the radially outer side of the hub 823, whereby the spokes 822 and one end side of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left side in FIG. 30A) Space can be formed between the In addition, the spokes 822 are formed of a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from the hub 823 to the edge 824, and include openings 822a that are open between the circumferentially adjacent spokes 822.

  The thickness dimension of the drive motor KM2 in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 is approximately half that of the outer reel 821. As described above, in the hub 823, the position in the axial direction is substantially the same as the center of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction, and the space at one end (left in FIG. 30A) of the opening of the outer reel 821 Therefore, most of the drive motor KM2 can be disposed inside the outer reel 821. As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

  The housing unit 880 is formed in a box-like body whose front side is open, and can accommodate the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 inside thereof. The housing unit 880 mainly includes a pair of left and right side wall portions 881 and an upper wall portion 882, a lower wall portion 883 and a back wall portion 884 disposed on the edge between the pair of side wall portions 881 facing each other. It is formed.

  The side wall portion 881 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in a side view, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30A), and also in the front and rear direction (FIG. 30B). In the left-right direction) is smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum.

  In the side wall portion 881, a drive motor KM2 for driving the outer reel unit 820 is disposed on the right surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 in the front view left side (the left side in FIG. 30A). The drive motor KM1 for driving the inner reel unit 810 is disposed on the left surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881). That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced with respect to the side wall portion 881.

  Further, the side wall portion 881 includes a bulging portion 881 a that bulges in a curved shape corresponding to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 on the side surface on the front side. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that light emitted from the backlight unit 830 described later escapes from the left and right outer sides of the inner reel 811.

  Also, the side wall portion 881 is formed of a metal material. Thereby, the rigidity of the accommodation unit 880 can be increased. Further, the heat generated in the inside of the containing unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the containing unit 880 by being generally made of a metal material having a thermal conductivity higher than that of the resin material. As a result, heat buildup inside the containing unit 880 can suppress breakage of parts.

  The upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are plate members that form the upper and lower side surfaces of the housing unit 880, and the edge and lower portion (upper portion in FIG. 30B) of the side wall portion 881 (FIG. 30B) And the lower edge).

  The width dimension of the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 30A) is formed smaller than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction (axial direction). Thus, the distance dimension between the facing side walls 881 can be secured, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be disposed between the facing sides.

  Further, in the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883, a plurality of through holes penetrating in the radial direction with respect to the axis of the outer reel 821 are formed. Thereby, the fluidity of air between the inside and the outside of the containing unit 880 can be enhanced. As a result, heat can be suppressed from being accumulated inside the accommodation unit 880, and the components can be suppressed from being broken by the heat of the accommodation unit 880.

  The rear wall portion 884 is a plate member that forms the side surface on the rear surface side of the accommodation unit 880, and is disposed along the edge on the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 30B) of the side wall portion 881.

  The rear wall portion 884 is formed with an opening 884a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position intersecting the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 30B), and both left and right ends where the opening 884a is formed And a standing portion 884b which is erected by bending on the front side.

  The width dimension of the opening 884a in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 30A) is formed larger than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. Thereby, the outer reel 821 can be prevented from colliding with the rear wall portion 884 when it moves (swings) in the front-rear direction due to inertial force or vibration of the rotational operation.

  That is, when the outer reel 821 is moved (swayed) in the front-rear direction by the inertial force or vibration of the rotational movement (a part of the rear side (right side in FIG. 30B) of the outer reel 821 is It can be inserted inside the As a result, the outer reel 821 can be prevented from colliding with the rear wall portion 884.

  In addition, the flowability of air can be enhanced between the inside and the outside of the containing unit 880 by the opening 884a. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from remaining inside the accommodation unit 880, and to suppress breakage of parts due to the heat of the accommodation unit 880.

  Here, if an opening 884a larger than the width in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 is formed in the rear wall 884, the rigidity of the rear wall 884 adjacent to the left and right of the opening 884a is lowered. Therefore, there is a risk that the back wall 884 may bend.

  Further, in this case, it is conceivable to increase the rigidity of the back wall 884 adjacent to the left and right of the opening 884a by enlarging the opposing space of the side wall 881, but the decorative symbol is displayed by enlarging the opposing space. There is a problem that the unit itself of the apparatus 800 becomes large.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the erected portions 884 b are formed on the left and right sides of the rear wall portion 884 at the position where the opening 884 a is formed. Thereby, the rigidity of the back wall 884 can be increased. As a result, bending of the back wall 884 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back wall 884 is formed of a metal material, and the distance dimension from the left and right ends of the opening 884 a to the left and right ends of the back wall 884 is sufficiently reduced. Therefore, the deformation rate of plastic deformation when forming the left and right ends of the back wall 884 can be increased. As a result, the rigidity can be increased.

  The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from the inside of the inner reel 811 in order to make it easy for the player to recognize the symbol of the inner reel 811.

  The backlight unit 830 is formed in an arc shape in a side view, and the axis of the arc is disposed coaxially with the axis of the inner reel 811. Further, the width dimension in the axial direction of the backlight unit 830 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the axial direction of the inner reel 811.

  Further, the circumferential length L4 of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to be three lengths of a pattern to be decorated on the inner reel 811 described later.

  Further, in the backlight unit 830, three concave portions 831 which are recessed inward in the radial direction on the outer peripheral surface are arranged in parallel in the circumferential direction. Therefore, partition plates 832 are provided between the respective recessed portions 831 so as to stand on the radially outer side of the backlight unit 830, respectively.

  A base member 833 including an LED for emitting light is disposed on the radially inner side surface of each recess 831, and the LED can emit light toward the radially outer side of the backlight unit 830.

  Each base member 833 can be independently supplied with power, and the inner reel 811 can partially emit light. In this case, since each base member 833 is disposed in the area (recessed portion 831) surrounded by four sides, the light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 is incident on the front surface area of the other base member 833. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be easily made to emit light partially.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be described. FIG. 33 (a) is a front view in which the inner reel 811 is expanded, and FIG. 33 (b) is a front view in which the outer reel 821 is expanded.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, on the inner reel 811, a plurality of symbols are drawn at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33). The dimension L5 of the symbol 1 in the circumferential direction is set to one third of the circumferential dimension L4 of the backlight unit 830 as described above (L5 × 3 = L4).

  In addition, the inner reel 811 is entirely formed of a material capable of transmitting light. In particular, the portion of the pattern (for example, the display of "7") has a light transmittance higher than that of the surrounding margin portion. Therefore, by irradiating light from the LED of the backlight unit 830 disposed inside the inner reel 811, the light of the LED can be transmitted through the inner reel 811 to make the portion of the design float up. Therefore, if the LEDs of the backlight unit 830 are in the light emitting state, the inner reel 811 is not illuminated even if the outer light (the light in the store or the light of the other LEDs disposed on the pachinko machine 10) is irradiated to the inner reel 811. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the symbol.

  In the present embodiment, five types of ten symbols are drawn continuously in the circumferential direction, and a maximum of three symbols can be viewed from the player side by the segment display device 600 described later. As described above, in each of the decorative symbol display devices 800, symbols in different arrangements are decorated, and a maximum of nine symbols can be viewed by the player.

  Also, the pachinko machine 10 displays 3 × 3 symbols by the inner reel 811 to set an effective line of 5 jacks, 3 in parallel in the horizontal direction and 2 in the diagonal direction, in a diagonal direction. Be done. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three “7” symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines, it is possible to teach the player the occurrence of a jackpot state.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the outer reel 821 is provided with a non-decorative surface 821a which is not decorated and a non-transmissive surface 821b which is decorated which does not transmit light.

  The non-decorative surface 821a can transmit light without being decorated. That is, by forming the outer reel 821 from a transparent material (in the present embodiment, a transparent resin material), a non-decorative surface 821a that allows light transmission is formed. Note that the non-decorative surface 821a may be formed so as to be able to transmit light, and may be provided with, for example, a translucent decoration capable of transmitting light.

  The decorative symbol display device 800 rotates the outer reel unit 820 and directs the non-decorative surface 821a to the player side to allow the player to visually recognize the design of the inner reel 811 disposed inside the outer reel 821. it can. That is, the player can visually recognize the symbol of the inner reel 811 through the non-decorative surface 821a of the outer reel 821.

  The non-transmissive surface 821 b is made to be non-transmissive to light by providing a black decoration on the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 (the front side in the drawing of FIG. 33B). Further, the non-transmissive surface 821 b is formed to have three or more symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33B) in the circumferential direction.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, three symbols of the inner reel 811 can be displayed on the player side. Therefore, by setting the length in the circumferential direction of the non-transmissive surface 821 b to three symbols or more to be decorated on the inner reel 811, the outer reel unit 820 is rotated to make the non-transmissive surface of the outer reel 821 the player. By arranging on the side, it is possible to make the inner reel 811 invisible from the player side.

  Note that the length in the circumferential direction of the non-transmissive surface 821 b is not limited to three or more symbols to be decorated by the inner reel 811, and a circumferential direction in which the decoration of the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side It is sufficient if the length is formed. That is, the non-transmissive surface 821b may be formed by the circumferential length of the inner reel 811 which can be viewed from the player side.

  Further, the non-transmission surface 821 b includes a transmission region 821 b 1 which can partially transmit light, and a pattern 821 b 2 in which a pattern is decorated.

  The transmissive region 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 33) in front view. The transmissive area 821b1 is a portion that performs 7-segment display by being combined with the segment display device 600 described later, and can partially transmit the light transmitted through the inner reel 811 to the player side. This makes it possible to form a part of the seven-segment display described later.

  The pattern 821b2 is formed with a circumferential length of three of the symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811, and the outer reels are arranged so that each pattern 821b2 of each decorative pattern display device 800 is aligned in parallel in the horizontal direction By stopping 821, it is possible to teach the player the occurrence of the jackpot state.

  Further, as described above, since the periphery of the pattern 821b2 is non-transmissive, the player can make the inner reel 811 invisible. Therefore, it is possible to stop the symbol of the inner reel 811 on the effective line while producing an effect that three symbols of the symbol 821b2 are aligned. Therefore, the rotation effect of the outer reel 821 allows the player to gaze at the inner reel 811 substantially simultaneously with the completion of the effect of the outer reel 821 after having the player gaze at the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 will be described. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative symbol display device 800 in the range XXXV of FIG. 36 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotation member 812 and FIG. 36 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation member 812 taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820. In addition, a predetermined distance between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 protruding in the radial direction on one end side (left side in FIG. 34) of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 A gap is formed.

  The hub 812 a of the rotating member 812 is formed with a protrusion 812 a 1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a (in this embodiment, formed on an extension of the spokes 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusion 812a1 is formed in a mountain shape whose both sides are inclined in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, wind can be generated by the protrusion 812a1.

  Here, conventionally, the first reel (outer reel unit 820) rotatably formed and the inside of the first reel (outer reel unit 820) are substantially concentrically disposed and rotatably formed. A gaming machine provided with a second reel (inner reel unit 810) (ie, provided with a double reel structure) is known. Also known is a technique for removing and cleaning dust adhering to the display surface of the reel by bringing the rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. There is.

  However, the double reel structure has a problem that cleaning is difficult. That is, in the double reel structure, the space for arranging the above-described rotating brush between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)) Therefore, the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel and the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) can not be cleaned.

  That is, since the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is narrow, the decorative symbol is displayed in order to remove dust (garbage) stuck in between the opposite surfaces. The need to disassemble the device 800 makes it difficult to clean.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the wind can be generated by the projection 812a1. The extruded air (wind) collides with the edge portion 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 to flow into the space between the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

  In this case, since the space between the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 is narrower than the space on the inner circumferential side of the edge 824 and the hub 812a, the air is an edge The space 824 and the space on the inner peripheral side of the hub 812 a can flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. Thus, dust stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown away. As a result, adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 includes the outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape, and an edge portion 824 protruding radially inward from one axial direction side of the outer reel 821, and the inner reel unit An inner reel 810 is formed in a cylindrical shape and whose outer surface is opposed to the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at a predetermined distance, and radially inward from one axial direction side of the inner reel 811 and the inner reel 811 The outer surface includes a hub 812a facing the inner surface of the edge 824 at a predetermined distance, and the protrusion 812a1 is erected from the outer surface of the hub 812a toward the inner surface of the edge 824. The protrusion 812a1 is displaced in the circumferential direction between the hub 812a and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate a wind pressure, and using the wind pressure, the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 are It is possible to flow the air. Accordingly, dust can be removed by the flow of air, and the outer surface of the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral surface can be cleaned.

  Here, when an opening is formed in at least one of the edge 824 or the hub 812a, or when a part of the circumferential direction is divided, the space between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is The wind pressure generated by displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction escapes from the opening portion or the division portion, so the wind pressure weakens, and air flows between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 It becomes difficult to do it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the edge 824 and the hub 812a are formed in an annular shape as viewed in the axial direction and have a circumferentially continuous surface, the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a The wind pressure generated by the protrusion 812a1 being displaced in the circumferential direction can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be easily made to flow. As a result, between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 by utilizing the wind pressure generated by displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. Air can be made to flow easily.

  Further, due to the protrusion 812 a 1, in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811, the space between the hub 812 a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is narrowed. Accordingly, the atmospheric pressure between the facing of the hub 812 a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 can be easily changed by the projection 812 a 1. Therefore, a change in atmospheric pressure can be used to easily generate a wind, which is made to flow between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. Dust stuck to the outer circumferential surface or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown away. As a result, adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed.

  Specifically, air has the property of flowing from high pressure to low pressure, and the air pressure is partially increased by narrowing the facing between the protruding end of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. be able to. Therefore, the air pressure in the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 where changes in air pressure are unlikely to occur is between the opposed tip of the projection 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. Lower than the pressure of the As a result, air can be easily sent to the space between the facing of the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, and dust is prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. it can.

  Furthermore, the atmospheric pressure between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 can be increased, so that the protrusion 812a1 is displaced toward the edge 824 or the edge 824 is displaced toward the protrusion 812a1. It can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 are formed in the spokes 822 supporting the edge 824 and the spoke 812c supporting the hub 812a, the edge is formed through the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1. Air between the inner surface of the portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be exhausted to the outside (or air can be drawn from the outside between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a). That is, the flow resistance of the air can be reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812 a can be made to easily flow (outflow or inflow). As a result, the wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812 a is used to make the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 The air between them can be made to flow easily.

  Further, a protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a (the crotch is the edge 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820), and the spokes 822 (or spoke 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810). Since at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed in the second embodiment, it is possible to easily exert the effect of reducing the flow resistance by suctioning (or discharging) air through the outer opening 825. That is, when rotating one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 where the protrusion 812a1 is erected, the other of which the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 is formed is stopped. The resistance of the flow of air (exhaust or intake) through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

  The outer reel 821 is formed so as to be slightly inclined radially outward (expanded in diameter) from the edge 824 (one end) side to which the spokes 822 are connected to the other end side. Therefore, the air flowing from one end side can be easily sent to the other end side while the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 face each other. As a result, the flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be prevented from being stopped, and dust on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the inclination angle θ1 of the spoke 812c radially outward from the axis of the inner reel 811 is larger than the inclination angle θ2 of the spoke 822 outward from the axis of the outer reel 821 (θ1> θ2). Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) overlapping in the axial direction (left and right direction in FIG. 34) The dimensions in between are increased.

  Therefore, by rotationally displacing any one or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the outer surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 can be determined by the difference in the distance between the spoke 812c and the spoke 822. It can make it easy to generate a wind heading between the inner surface and the inner surface.

  Describing in detail, the separation distance between the spokes 812 c and the spokes 822 is increased toward the radially outer side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Therefore, when the spokes 812 c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position where the spokes 822 overlap in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is higher in the space between the spokes 812 c and the spokes 822 in the radially inner portion of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Will be raised.

  As described above, air has the property of flowing from the high pressure to the low pressure side. Thus, it is possible to create a flow of air from the radially inner portion towards the radially outer portion. That is, it is possible to form a flow of air from the shaft side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to the side facing the hub 812a and the edge 824. Therefore, air can be fed to the space between the facing of the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed.

  Further, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to be light transmissive, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810, It is possible to make the player visually recognize the variation of the symbol accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 through the outer reel unit 820. In this case, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, that is, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 whose number of rotations is larger than that of the outer reel unit 820. In the effect by the rotation of the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased. That is, in the double reel structure, cleaning can be facilitated.

  In addition, there is no operation of the player as the timing of cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 by rotating the inner reel unit 810 (the game ball is not hit in the game area) Preferably, the pachinko machine 10 is put on standby. In this case, since the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at high speed to generate wind, it is possible to attract the player's interest by switching the design of the inner reel 811.

  The outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while performing an effect of rotationally displacing the non-transmissive surface 821 b of the outer reel 821 toward the player. In this case, since the inner reel 811 is made invisible by the player, it is possible to perform the cleaning without making the player visually recognize the cleaning state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest. Further, since the game can be performed in the gaming state, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned even when the game is continued for a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of dust such as dust on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during the game.

  Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 63. First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 includes a vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left in front view, a vertical displacement unit 600R disposed on the right in front view, and a vertical displacement unit 600L on the left and right. , 600R are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and formed by fastening and fixing the connecting member 601 from the back side.

  The configurations of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R are substantially the same. Therefore, in the following description, only the vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left in front view will be described with respect to the vertical displacement units 600C and 600R. Detailed explanation is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described. FIG. 39 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 39 (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

  40 and 41, an aspect in which the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 and the displacement unit 650 are disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes a displacement unit 650 configured to be displaceable, and a first segment unit 610 and a second segment unit 620 disposed on the left and right of the displacement unit 650. Are provided with.

  The first segment unit 610 is a unit capable of displaying one segment in the left and right direction, and the second segment unit 620 is a unit capable of displaying two segments in the left and right direction. is there. Further, since the first segment unit 610 is formed by halving the second segment unit 620 in the left-right direction, only the second segment unit 620 will be described below, and the configuration of the second segment unit 620 will be described. The code is similarly assigned to the first segment unit 610.

  In each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R, the arrangement of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 is different, and the second segment unit 620 is provided only on the right side in front view. In the vertical displacement unit 610R, the second segment unit 620 is disposed in a view on the right side in a front view.

  Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment display on the left side in front view and two segment display on the right side in front view. In addition, the vertical displacement unit 600C can display two segments on only the right side in a front view. Furthermore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment as it is only on the right side in front view. That is, one segment can be formed on the left and right sides of each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 will be described. FIG. 42 (a) is a front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 42 (b) is a rear view of the second segment unit 620. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 includes a light transmission member 621 disposed on the front side, a partition member 622 disposed on the back surface of the light transmission member 621, and a partition member 622 Mainly includes a plurality of diffusion members 623 disposed on the back of the base member, a base member 624 disposed between the plurality of diffusion members 623, and reflection members 625 disposed on both sides of the base member 624. It is formed.

  The light transmitting member 621 is formed of a translucent light transmitting resin material through which light can pass. The light transmitting member 621 mainly includes a light transmitting portion 621a formed in a plate shape of a circular arc which is convex on the front side, and a flat portion 621b continuously formed above and below the light transmitting portion 621a. Ru.

  The light transmitting portion 621a has a vertical wall 621a1 erected on the rear side from the left and right ends, a fastening portion 621a2 annularly projecting from the upper and lower ends to the rear side, and a vertical direction on the front side left and right center position And a decorative portion 621a3 which is recessed on the back side continuously.

  The standing wall 621a1 is formed standing on the back side from the left and right ends of the light transmitting portion 621a. The dimension between facing walls of the standing walls 621a1 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the left-right direction of the partition member 622 described later. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion 621a, the partition member 622 can be restricted from moving to the left and right.

  The fastening portion 621 a 2 is a projection that forms a hole for fastening a reflecting member 625 described later with a screw, and is formed so as to protrude annularly from the back side of the light transmitting portion 621 a. Therefore, the reflecting member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of the screw to the inner edge portion of the fastening portion 621a2.

  The decorative portion 621a3 is, as described above, continuously recessed in the vertical direction at the left and right center position of the light transmitting portion 621a. Thereby, it can suppress that the light which permeate | transmits front view left side reflects inside decoration part 621a3, and is radiate | emitted from front view right side. A detailed description of the light transmitted through the decorative portion 621a3 will be described later.

  The flat portion 621 b is a plate member for fastening to a base member 660 of a displacement unit 650 described later. The flat portion 621 b is formed in a plate shape having a front view substantially the same shape as the base member 660, and by fastening a screw via the flat portion 621 b, the displacement unit 650 and the second segment unit 620 are fastened. can do.

  In addition, elastic pieces 621b1 are formed in the flat portion 621b so as to protrude to the opposite side. The elastic pieces 621b1 are formed so as to protrude from the opposing side surfaces of the flat portions 621b formed in a pair of upper and lower portions, and also protrude in a curved shape that is convex on the front side. In addition, the elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape having a radius smaller than that of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the projecting end thereof is the upper wall portion 882 or the lower wall of the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed inside the displacement unit 650. It is considered to be in contact with the portion 883. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative symbol display device 800 are rotationally driven, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the decorative symbol display device 800.

  The partition member 622 is formed of a resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is formed in a curved plate state in a side view. In the partition member 622, the radius of the curved outer peripheral surface is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the width in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42) is the width in the vertical direction of the light transmitting portion 621a. It is set smaller than. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 can be disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a while being grounded.

  Further, the partition member 622 is a first recessed portion 622a recessed toward the center from both left and right (right and left in FIG. 42) end faces in a front view, and recessed from the upper and lower end faces in FIG. It is mainly provided with the 2nd recessed part 622b provided, and the projecting part 622c which protrudes from the left-right center position by the side of a back.

  Two first recessed portions 622a are formed in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides. That is, the first recessed portion 622 a is formed in four places in the partition member 622.

  The second recessed portion 622 b is formed to be recessed from the upper and lower ends. The dimension between facings at the indented end of the second indented portion 622b is set to be substantially the same as the vertical distance of the fastening portion 621a2 formed in the light transmitting member 621. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back side of the light transmission member 621, the partition member 622 can be suppressed from moving in the vertical direction by inserting the fastening portion 621a2 inside the second recessed portion 622b. .

  The protruding portion 622 c is formed to extend in the vertical direction at the left and right center position of the partition member 622. In addition, the protruding portion 622c includes a recessed portion 622c1 which is recessed in the protruding end surface thereof. The width dimension in the left-right direction of the recess 622c1 is formed larger than the thickness dimension of the base member 624 described later. Thus, when the base member 624 is disposed on the partition member 622, the tip end side of the base member 624 can be inserted into the inside of the recess 622c1. As a result, when the base member 624 is arranged, the base member 624 can be positioned, and the base member 624 can be restrained from moving in the left-right direction.

  The diffusion member 623 is formed of a cloudy resin material and can diffuse light entering the inside. The diffusion member 623 is formed in a curved plate shape in a side view, and the radius of the outer peripheral portion (front side) thereof is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral portion (rear side) of the partition member 622. Therefore, the diffusion member 623 can be disposed in a state of being grounded to the back side of the partition member 622.

  Further, two diffusion members 623 are vertically juxtaposed and arranged in parallel, and two right and left separated by a predetermined distance. That is, four diffusion members 623 are disposed on the back side of the partition member 622.

  The width dimension in the left-right direction of the diffusion member 623 is set to be substantially the same as the opposing dimension between the standing wall 621 a 1 of the light transmitting member 621 and the projecting portion 622 c of the partition member 622. Thereby, when the diffusion member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the diffusion member 623 from moving to the left and right.

  Further, the diffusion member 623 is formed to include a projecting portion 623a projecting to the front side and a recessed portion 623b recessed on the back side of the projecting portion 623a.

  The projecting portion 623a is formed so as to project at a position corresponding to the first recessed portion 622a of the partition member 622 disposed on the front side of the diffusion member 623 and is disposed in a state of being inserted inside the first recessed portion 622a. It will be set up. Accordingly, when the diffusion member 623 is disposed on the back surface side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress that the partition member 622 shifts in the left and right direction and in the vertical direction.

  Further, the protrusion distance of the protrusion 623 a is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622. That is, it is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the projecting end surface of the projecting portion 623a and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 (see FIG. 45).

  The recessed portion 623b is formed on a side opposite to the protruding portion 623a (the back surface side of the diffusion member 623) in a shape slightly smaller than the front view shape of the protruding portion 623a. Is formed. Thereby, the thickness of the plate of the diffusion member 623 can be made substantially constant, and distortion when molding the diffusion member 623 can be suppressed. Further, the recessed portion 623b is formed to be slightly smaller than the protruding portion 623a, whereby the area on the back side of the end portion of the protruding portion 623a can be increased. Therefore, the amount of light incident on the diffusion member 623 from the LED 624a described later can be increased at the end of the protrusion 623a. As a result, it is possible to make the mode of light visually recognized by the player through the diffusion member 623 clear (clear), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

  The base member 624 is formed of a crescent-shaped plate whose front side is curved, and includes an LED 624 a that emits light to the side. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the recessed end surface of the recess 622c1 formed in the partition member 622. Therefore, when the base member 624 is disposed on the rear surface of the partition member 622, the base member 624 is inserted into the inside of the recess 622c1 of the partition member 622, thereby suppressing the positional shift of the base member 624 in the left-right direction. it can.

  A plurality of LEDs 624 a are disposed on the left and right side surfaces of the base member 624, and the irradiation direction is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624. That is, the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 624a is the left and right direction. A detailed description of the light irradiation of the LED 624a will be described later.

  One reflecting member 625 is disposed on each of the left and right sides of the base member 624. The reflecting member 625 is formed of a white resin material, and is formed in a circular arc shape convex on the front side. The radius of the arc of the reflecting member 625 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the diffusing member 623. Thus, when the reflection member 625 is disposed on the back side of the diffusion member 623, the reflection member 625 and the diffusion member 623 can be in a state of being grounded.

  The reflecting member 625 is formed in a plate-like body separated from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the back side to the front side, and has an inclined portion 625a inclined from the back side to the front side, and the inclined portion 625a And a wall portion 625c projecting toward the front side at the upper end portion, the lower end portion and the middle portion of the recess portion 625b. It is formed.

  The front side of the inclined portion 625a is a reflecting surface 625a1 that reflects the light of the LED 624a of the base member 624 toward the front side, and is formed to be inclined at approximately 60 degrees with respect to the side surface of the base member 624. As described above, since the light irradiation direction of the LED 624 a is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624, the reflective surface 625 a 1 is formed to be inclined with respect to the side surface of the base member 624. The light emitted from can be reflected to the front side. In addition, the advancing aspect of the light of LED624a is mentioned later.

  The concave portion 625b is formed to be concave on the back side in a convex curved shape. Further, the recess 625b is formed at a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, whereby the amount of light of the LED 624a to be visually recognized by the player via the diffusion member 623 can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the travel of light emitted from the LED 624 a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along line XLV-XLV of FIG. In FIG. 45, a part of the light emitted from the LED 624a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Further, the outer shape of the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed on the left and right rear sides of the second segment unit 620 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the reflecting surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflecting surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle). Can be reflected outward. In this case, since the reflecting member 625 is formed of a plate member having a substantially constant thickness, the space on the opposite side of the reflecting surface 625a1 (the back side of the reflecting member 625) can be enlarged. Thus, the end of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be disposed on the back side of the second segment unit 620.

  Here, at least one of rotation (decorative symbol display device 800) rotatably formed and arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and arranged along the interval between the plurality of rotating cylinders Light emitting member (light transmitting member 621), and a substrate (base member 624) disposed on the back side of the decoration member and on which a plurality of light emitting means (LED 624a) are mounted; There is known a gaming machine in which a substrate is disposed in a posture in which the surface on which the means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. According to this gaming machine, not only the space between the rotating bodies can be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern is formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light of the light emitting means transmitted through the decorative member, It is possible to produce an effect of making the player visually recognize the design of the decorative member integrally with the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the substrate is disposed in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficient for the back surface of the decorative member It is impossible to illuminate the pattern formed by the light of the light emitting means, and the design can not be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there is a problem that the rendering effect is insufficient. On the other hand, while the design formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means is small, if the decoration member (area except the design) is enlarged, the sense of unity between the decoration member and the rotating drum is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the reflection member 625 for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 624a to the back surface of the light transmission member 621 is provided, the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the light transmission member 621. Even when the base member 624 is disposed in the above-described posture, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED 624 a to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 can be widened. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of LED 624a can be enlarged that much, and a presentation effect can be heightened. Further, since the area formed by the light of the LED 624a can be made larger by the size of the pattern formed (displayed), the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, so that the sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be formed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 45, the light transmitting member 621 is located on the front side relative to the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 and has an outer edge up to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 in front view. Since it is formed to be extended, the end face in the axial direction of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (not easily visible). In addition, since the design of the light transmission member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624 a and the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be made closer to each other, the light transmission member 621 is formed. And a sense of unity with the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily formed.

  Furthermore, the reflecting member 625 connects the surface of the base member 624 on which the LED 624 a is mounted to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 to form a region on the base member 624 where the LED 624 a is mounted and a pattern on the light transmitting member 621. And light is emitted from the LED 624a, since the back surface of the reflecting member 625 is inclined in a direction away from the axial end face of the decorative symbol display device 800 as it goes from the light transmitting member 621 to the base member 624. The back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 while securing the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by the The decorative symbol display device 800 can be made to approach the back side (close to the base member 624). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded (not easily visible) from the player, and the sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily formed.

  Further, since the LEDs 624a are mounted on both the one side surface and the other side surface of the base member 624, the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on the one side surface is mounted on the other side surface Different patterns can be formed (displayed) independently on the light transmission member 621 depending on the light emitted from the LED 624 a.

  In this case, the number of base members 624 disposed between the decorative symbol display devices 800 arranged in parallel can be one. Therefore, the space necessary for the disposition of the base member 624 can be reduced, and accordingly, the decorative symbol display device 800 is made to enter the back side of the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 (the decorative symbol display device 800 approaches the base member 624). Can). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded (not easily visible) from the player, and the sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily formed.

  Furthermore, as described above, the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflective surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle). Can be reflected outward. Thereby, the reflecting member 625 can be made smaller (as compared with the case where the reflecting surface 625a1 is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624). Therefore, the space on the back side of the second segment unit 620 can be secured accordingly. As a result, since the second segment unit 620 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be disposed close to each other, the sense of unity between the light transmission member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily formed.

  Next, the relationship between the LED 624a and the recess 625b will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a side view of the base member 624. FIG. FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along line XLVII-XLVII in FIG. 42 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed in a square shape in a side view, and can emit light from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624 a are spaced apart at an inclination angle θ 1 circumferentially around an axis substantially the same as the bending axis on the front side of the base member 624. Thereby, the heat stored in the base member 624 by the irradiation of the LED 624 a can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the base member 624 is partially high in heat and breakage of the LED 624 a.

  In the present embodiment, eight LEDs 624 a are distributed in the circumferential direction. In addition, the LEDs 624 a are disposed in a direction in which one side of the light emitting surface formed in a square is along the tangential direction in the curved shape of the base member 624.

  Here, a substrate (base member 624) on which a plurality of light emitting means (LED 624a) are conventionally mounted, and a transmitting member (light transmitting member 621) for transmitting light emitted from the light emitting means are provided. There is known a gaming machine in which a light transmitting portion 621a) of the transmitting member 621 is curved and formed, and a plurality of light emitting means are arranged along the curvature of the transmitting member. In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals in a front view of the transmission member. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (chord) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the interval between adjacent light emitting means is narrowed at a part of the plurality of light emitting means, so that there is a problem that the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means is biased. Therefore, heat is concentrated on a part of the light emitting means, which tends to reduce the life.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the LEDs 624a are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between the adjacent LEDs 624a can be made constant in each LED 624a, and the heat distribution emitted by the LEDs 624a can be made uniform. As a result, concentration of heat on some of the LEDs 624a can be suppressed, and the life of each of the LEDs 624a can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 47, one recess 625b is formed on the back side (right side in FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. Further, the separation distances X1 from one end side (lower end portion) to the other end side (upper end portion) in the vertical direction of the concave portion 625b of 1 are respectively set to be the same.

  Here, as described above, the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals at the inclination angle θ1 in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the vertical direction interval of each LED 624a is narrower at the center side in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) than at the outer side in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting member 625 and irradiated to the player side increases toward the center in the vertical direction (the center side in the vertical direction becomes dark), making the light visible uniformly to the player There was a problem that I could not do it.

  In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals (that is, circumferentially equal intervals) along the curvature of the light transmission part 621a, the plurality of LEDs 624a are not equally spaced in a front view of the light transmission part 621a. Will be arranged in That is, in the front view of the light transmission part 621a, a region where the distance between the LEDs 624a is narrow and a wide region are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the light amount becomes uneven along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the reflecting member 625 for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 624a toward the light transmitting portion 621a is provided, and the reflecting member 625 includes a plurality of recessed portions 625b divided corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 624a. Since the section widths of the light transmitting portions 621a of the plurality of recessed portions 625b in the front view are set to be substantially the same, the light amounts of the respective recessed portions 625b viewed in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a can be substantially the same. As a result, the distribution of light quantity along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a can be made uniform.

  That is, since the separation distances X1 from the one end side (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of the concave portion 625b of 1 are respectively set the same, the player is irradiated with the irradiation of the LED 624a of 1 The area of the light emitted to the side can be made substantially the same in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of light emitted to the player side toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, the light can be uniformly viewed by the player.

  In addition, since the light emitting surface of the LED 624 a is formed in a rectangular shape (square) in front view, for example, the diffusibility of light can be secured as compared to the case where the light emitting surface is circular (light is emitted at a wider angle) Since it is possible, the distribution of the light quantity can be made uniform in the recess 625b of 1.

  In addition, a light emission surface means the front of the sealing resin which encloses a LED chip. Therefore, the light emitting surface having a rectangular shape in front view means that the front shape of the sealing resin (the front shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the sealing resin) is rectangular.

  Furthermore, at least a part of the plurality of LEDs 624a is disposed in a direction in which one side of the light emitting surface follows the tangential direction in the curved shape of the light transmitting portion 621a, so that light emitted from the LEDs 624a is transmitted to the light transmitting portion 621a. It can be easily diffused along the curvature of the As a result, it is possible to make the distribution of the amount of light visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a uniform.

  In addition, the concave portion 625b is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the light transmission portion 621a and is recessed on the side away from the rear surface of the light transmission portion 621a, and the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is opposed to the light transmission portion 621a As a result, the base member 624 can be disposed in a posture perpendicular to the light transmitting portion 621a. That is, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the unit including the light transmitting portion 621a, the base member 624, and the reflecting member 625 can be increased. In this case, the recess 625b is disposed in such a manner as to surround the periphery of the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED 624a from the direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the light, so the light reflected by the recess 625b is the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. Can be uniformly incident on the As a result, it is possible to make the distribution of the amount of light visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a uniform.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, an aspect of the light emitted by the LED 624a will be described. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In FIG. 48, the light emitted by the LED 624a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line and is illustrated with the code of the irradiation region SR1.

  As shown in FIG. 48, by emitting light from the LED 624a, light is irradiated to the first segment unit 610 from the two irradiation areas SR1 aligned in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). In addition, light is irradiated to the second segment unit 620 from the irradiation region SR1 arranged in 2 × 2 vertically and horizontally. The irradiation region SR1 of the second segment unit 620 is formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion 621a3 of the light transmitting member 621.

  Therefore, by the irradiation area SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620, it is possible to display the left and right sides of the number in the seven-segment display. The upper and lower portions and the center of the numbers in the 7-segment display will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 49 and 50, the state in which the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L is disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 is disposed on a base member 660 disposed on the left and right, a displacement member 670 pivotally supported by the base member 660 and rotationally displaced, and disposed on the base member 660 And drive means 680 for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.

  The base member 660 is formed of a pair of plate members on the left and right of the shape provided with a larger space at the center than the decorative symbol display device 800 described above. In addition, the first segment unit 610 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the left side in a front view, and the second segment unit 620 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the right side in the front view. The base members 660 are arranged horizontally and vertically opposite each other. In the present embodiment, only the base member 660 on the left in front view is described, and the description on the base member 660 on the left in front view is omitted.

  The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction in a side view, and includes a projecting portion 661 that protrudes and curves in a convex shape from the side surface on the front side to the front side. The base member 660 is a through hole 662 for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM3 disposed at one end (upper end) in the vertical direction, and a connection disposed at both ends (lower end) in the vertical direction An insertion hole 663 for inserting the rod 681, a recess 664 on which a displacement member 670 to be described later is pivotally supported, a sliding groove 665 having an arc shape centered on the axis of the recess 664, and upper and lower of the recess 664 And an engaging portion 666 projecting to the hall.

  The protrusion 661 is set such that the radius of the protrusion tip thereof is smaller than the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the reflecting member 625 described above, and the bending axis thereof is set on substantially the same straight line as the bending axis of the reflecting member 625. Therefore, when the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are disposed on the base member 660, the protrusion 661 and the reflection member 625 can be prevented from contacting each other, and the heat of the base member 624 is opposed to each other. Intrusion between the opposing base members 660 can be suppressed. As a result, the temperature of the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed inside the opposing base members 660 rises, and breakage of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 for rotationally driving the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be suppressed.

  The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and the gear 682 connected to the shaft are inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed larger than the outer diameter of the gear 682 and smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. It is set. Therefore, the drive motor KM3 can be disposed on the base member 660 in a state where the gear 682 is connected to the drive motor KM3. The drive motor KM3 is attached to the base member 660 from the opposing side of the opposed base members 660.

  The through holes 662 are holes into which the connection rods 681 of the drive means 680 described later are inserted, and are formed larger than the outer shape of the connection rods 681 and formed at the upper and lower ends of the base member 660.

  The concave portion 664 is formed in a circular shape and recessed outward from the opposing side of the base member 660. The recess 664 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connection protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 described later. Thereby, the connection protrusion 671b can be inserted and disposed inside the recess 664.

  The sliding groove 665 can connect the displacement member 670 and the drive means 680 disposed outside the pair of base members 660 by inserting the connection projection 671b of the displacement member 670. Further, the connection protrusion 671b is inserted into the sliding groove 665, whereby the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be performed smoothly.

  The engagement portion 666 is formed on the opposite side of the base member 660 with a gap whose tip is larger than the diameter of the opposite side surface of the base member 660 and one end of a torsion spring SP1 described later. Thus, one end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the engagement portion 666.

  The displacement members 670 are disposed in opposite directions in the upper and lower pair. The displacement member 670 is formed of an extending member 671 whose one end is pivotally supported by the base member 660, and a decoration unit 672 connected to the other end of the extending member 671.

  The extending members 671 are formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape, and are disposed in a pair in opposite directions. The extending member 671 has an axial support hole 671a penetrating in the left and right direction at one end on the longitudinal side, a connecting projection 671b projecting outward to the left and right in the longitudinal direction substantially central position on the longitudinal side, and an axial support hole 671a from the longitudinal side The projection 671 d is formed mainly of a circumferentially projecting protrusion 671 d and an elastic member 671 f made of an elastic material and disposed on the side surface of the extending member 671.

  The bearing hole 671 a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. Therefore, by inserting the collar C into the shaft support hole 671 a and fastening and fixing the collar C inside the recess 664 of the base member 660 with a screw, the displacement member 670 is rotatably connected to the base member 660 it can.

  Further, the bearing holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 are coaxially disposed, and the collar C is inserted into the bearing holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastened and fixed to the base member 660. The displacement member 670 is coaxially rotatably disposed.

  Further, in the left and right extending members 671, a bulging portion 671 a 1 is formed around the one axial support hole 671 a so as to expand outward in the left-right direction. The outer diameter of the bulging portion 671 a 1 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 664 of the base member 660. The bulging portions 671 a 1 are disposed on the left and right sides of the pair of displacement members 670.

  That is, in the present embodiment, since the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the pivoting hole 671a of the right side of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side, the pivoting hole 671a of the right side of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side , And are arranged inside the bulging portion 671a1. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the left axial support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side, the left axial support hole 671a is provided with the left axial support of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side. The hole 671a is disposed inside the bulging portion 671a1 (see FIG. 49).

  Accordingly, when the displacement member 670 is disposed on the base member 660 by the collar C, the bulging portion 671a1 can be inserted into the recess 664. As a result, when a force is applied in the radial direction of the axis of the support hole 671a of the displacement member 670, the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 671a1 and the inner peripheral surface of the recess 664 contact each other. Damage to the color C can be suppressed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, since the displacement members 670 disposed in a pair are disposed coaxially with the base member 660, the axial length of the collar C is increased accordingly. Therefore, when a force acts on the rotation shaft of the displacement member 670 in the radial direction, the force tends to act on the rotation shaft. Therefore, when the bearing hole 671a or the collar C is easily broken, the bulging portion 671a1 and the concave portion 664 abut each other to maintain the force acting in the radial direction on the rotation shaft of the displacement member 670. can do. As a result, breakage of the bearing hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

  The protrusion 671 d is formed with a through hole 671 d 1 penetrating in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal direction of the extending member 671. The through holes 671d1 are holes through which torsion springs SP1 and SP2 described later are inserted, and are formed larger than the outer diameters of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

  The elastic members 671 f are disposed on the side surfaces of the extending members 671 on the side closer to each other of the displacement members 670 disposed in a pair of upper and lower members described later. In addition, when the upper and lower extending members 671 are disposed at positions adjacent to each other, the size is set such that the side surfaces of the elastic members 671f abut each other. Thereby, it is possible to absorb an impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced close to each other.

  The drive means 680 is a means for transmitting the power of the drive motor KM 3 to the displacement member 670. The drive means 680 includes a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, a large diameter gear 683 meshing with the gear 682 and a rod-like body, one end of which is connected to the side of the large diameter gear 683 and the other end A first link member 684 connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 transmitting power to the opposite side via the base member 660, and a cam member 685 connected to the connecting rod 681 for rotation; The second link member 686 is formed mainly in a rod-like body, one end of which is rotatably connected to the cam member 685, and the other end of which is connected to the displacement member 670.

  The gear 682 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3 as described above, and is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

  The large diameter gear 683 is formed in a circular shape in a side view, and includes a gear surface 683a formed on a tooth surface meshing with the gear 682 and a projection 683b projecting annularly on the side surface in the rotation axis direction. It is formed. The large diameter gear 683 is rotated by the rotation of the gear 682 because the gear surface 683 a meshes with the gear 682. That is, the drive motor KM3 is rotated by being rotationally driven.

  The protrusion 683 b is formed in an annular shape so that its axis is disposed at a position different from the rotation axis of the large diameter gear 683. Therefore, when the large diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the projection 683 b is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

  The first link member 684 is formed into a rod-like body, and insertion holes 684a and 684b are formed at both ends thereof in the left-right direction.

  The insertion hole 684a is a hole into which the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 683b. The first link member 684 can be rotated by the large diameter gear 683 by inserting the projection 683b into the insertion hole 684a and fastening the tip of the projection 683b with a screw whose outer diameter of the head is larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684a. It can be connected in the state.

  The insertion hole 684 b is a hole into which the connection protrusion 671 b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connection protrusion 671 b. The connection protrusion 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 684b, and the tip of the connection protrusion 671b is fastened with a screw whose head outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b. Can be connected in the

  Therefore, when the large diameter gear 683 is rotated via the gear 682, the protrusion 683 b is rotationally displaced about the rotation axis of the large diameter gear 683 with the rotational displacement of the large diameter gear 683, and the protrusion 683 b The first link member 684 to which one end is coupled is displaced, and the displacement member 670 coupled to the other end of the first link member 684 is displaced.

  The connecting rod 681 is inserted into the insertion hole 663 of the base member 660 disposed at one end on the left side in a front view, and is internally fitted to the rotation shaft portion of the large diameter gear 683. On the other hand, the other end of the connecting rod 681 is connected to the cam member 685. Therefore, the connection rod 681 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3, and the cam member 685 is rotated.

  The cam member 685 is formed in a circular shape in a side view, and the connecting rod 681 is fitted in the axial portion thereof. Further, the cam member 685 is provided with a protrusion 685a which protrudes annularly outward from the side surface in the axial direction. The protrusion 685 a is formed in an annular shape so that the axis thereof is disposed at a position different from the rotation axis of the cam member 685. Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the projection 685 a is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

  The second link member 686 is formed in the same shape as the first link member 684 with the left and right reversed. The second link member 686 is provided with insertion holes 686a and 686b at both ends in the longitudinal direction.

  The insertion hole 686a is a hole into which the protrusion 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 685a. A state in which the second link member 686 can be rotated to the cam member 685 by fastening the protrusion 685a into the insertion hole 686a and screwing the tip of the protrusion 685a with a screw whose head outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 686a. Can be connected with

  The insertion hole 686 b is a hole into which the connection protrusion 671 b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connection protrusion 671 b. The second link member 686 can be rotated to the displacement member 670 by connecting the connection projection 671b into the insertion hole 686b and fastening the tip of the connection projection 671b with a screw whose head outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b. Can be connected in the

  Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated through the connecting rod 681, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced about the rotation axis of the cam member 685 with the rotational displacement of the cam member 685, and one end is attached to the protrusion 685a. The second link member 686 coupled is displaced, and the displacement member 670 coupled to the other end of the second link member 686 is displaced.

  That is, the displacement member 670, the first link member 684, and the second link member 686 are displaced. Here, since the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connection rod 681, it is possible to suppress the tilting when the displacement member 670 is displaced. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be displaced smoothly.

  Next, the displacement member 670 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. 51 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 670, and FIG. 51 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member 670 taken along line LIII-LIII of 51 (a).

  As described above, the displacement member 670 is formed to include the extending member 671 rotatably supported by the base member 660 and the decoration unit 672 connected to the extending member 671.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the extending member 671 includes a connection portion 671c formed in a plate shape on the short side (the connection side of the decoration unit 672). A step portion 671c1 partially protruding in a step-like manner is formed on the surface of the extending members 671 disposed on the left and right sides and facing each other between the connecting portions 671c. The step portions 671c1 are alternately formed on the left and right, and the step portions 671c1 are engaged with each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Thus, dimensional errors can be absorbed when the extension member 671 is molded.

  The decoration unit 672 is a unit that includes an LED that emits light inside and emits light to the player side. The decoration unit 672 includes a back cover 673 disposed on the back side, a front cover 676 disposed on the front side of the back cover 673 covering the back cover 673, a back cover 673 and a front cover 676 And a diffusion member 675 and a lens member 677 disposed between the base member 674 and the front cover 676.

  The back cover 673 is formed in a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in a front view and a horizontally long shape, and the connecting portion 671 c of the extending member 671 is fastened to the back side. Thereby, the decoration unit 672 and the extending member 671 can be fastened.

  In addition, the back cover 673 is formed of a resin material that is hard to transmit light (impermeable). The back cover 673 is provided with a reflecting portion 673a formed concave on the back side at a position facing the diffusion member 675 described later.

  The reflective portion 673a is formed on the lower edge portion of the back cover 673 in the left-right direction, and the inner surface thereof is coated with a white paint having a high light reflectance. Thus, the light emitted to the inside of the reflection portion 673a can be reflected inside the reflection portion 673a and emitted to the diffusion member 675 side.

  The front cover 676 has a front view shape substantially the same as the shape of the back cover 673, and is disposed in a manner to cover the front side of the back cover 673. The front cover 676 is formed of a resin material capable of transmitting light, and can emit light emitted from a first LED 674a and a second LED described later to the front side (player side).

  The base member 674 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body smaller than the rear cover 673 in a front view. It is disposed on the front side of the base member 674 side by side in the left and right direction at the lower edge, and is disposed above the first LED 674a that emits light to the diffusion member 675 side and the first LED 674a. And a second LED 674b for emitting light.

  The first LED 674 a is disposed at a position facing the upper end portion of the diffusion member 675 and is disposed to be able to emit light downward of the base member 674. Thereby, it can suppress that the light irradiated from 1st LED674a injects into the lens member 677 mentioned later. As a result, it becomes easy for the player to distinguish between the light emitted to the front side through the diffusion member 675 and the light emitted to the front side through the lens member 677, and the interest of the player is impaired. It can be suppressed.

  The second LED 674 b is disposed on the top of the first LED 674 a. Accordingly, the light of the second LED 674 b can be made incident on the lens member 677 disposed on the upper portion of the diffusion member 675.

  The diffusion member 675 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like member in a front view, and is disposed at the lower end portion on the back side of the front cover 676. The diffusion member 675 is formed of an opaque resin material capable of diffusing light incident on the inside. As a result, the light emitted from the first LED 674 a and diffused to the diffusion member 675 can be diffused to make the light uniform throughout and emitted to the front side (player's side).

  The lens member 677 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like member in a front view, and is disposed at the upper end portion on the back side of the front cover 676. The lens member 677 is formed of a transparent resin material, and a plurality of protrusions are formed on the back side (not shown). Thereby, the light emitted from the second LED 674 b can be easily made to enter inside by the protrusion on the back side. As a result, even if the amount of light emitted from the second LED 674 b is reduced, the light can be incident on the lens member 677, and the light can be emitted to the front side (player's side) of the front cover 676.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, an aspect of light emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 by the first LED 674a will be described. FIG. 54 is a front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. In FIG. 54, the area of the light emitted toward the player by the first LED 674a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and is also illustrated with the code of the irradiation area SR2.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the area of the light emitted toward the player by the first LED 674a is rectangular at the lower end of the decoration unit 672 (front cover 676) and is elongated in the left-right direction. The displacement members 670 are disposed at the upper and lower ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, so that the irradiation regions SR2 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction by the displacement members 670. Therefore, by the irradiation area SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, upper and lower display of numbers by 7-segment display can be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the seven-segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described. FIG. 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. FIG. 56 is a schematic view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. As shown in FIG. 55 and 56, the transparent region 821b1 of the outer reel 821 is rotated toward the player, and the irradiation region SR1, the irradiation region SR2 and the transmission region 821b1 are illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Ru.

  As shown in FIG. 55, two irradiation regions SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are formed in the vertical direction, and six in the horizontal direction. It is assumed that

  The irradiation area SR1 is formed as a set of four in a mode in which the decorative symbol display device 800 is interposed between the irradiation area SR1, and the set is arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Irradiation areas SR2 are disposed at the top and bottom between one set of irradiation areas SR1, and transmission areas 821b1 are disposed at upper and lower intermediate positions. Therefore, the number of seven-segment display can be displayed by the seven irradiation areas SR1 and SR2 and the transmission area 821b1.

  As described above, since four sets of the irradiation region SR1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, a seven-segment display is formed by each set. That is, the seven-segment display is in a state in which three in the left-right direction are arranged in parallel.

  Therefore, it is possible to display numbers as 7-segment displays juxtaposed in the left-right direction as effective lines for lottery of the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, all 7-segment displays make "7" segment display Thus, not only the jackpot display by the decorative symbol display device 800 described above, but also the jackpot display by the 7-segment display can be performed. As a result, since the player can be made to visually recognize a plurality of display modes, the player's interest can be improved.

  Here, since the light transmitting portion 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 is curved in a convex shape on the front side, the player is allowed to visually recognize the display of seven segments. In this case, the display in the central portion in the vertical direction closer to the player becomes larger, and the display in the both ends in the vertical direction smaller from the player becomes smaller. Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to make the player visually recognize the display of the number by 7 segments neatly.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the seven-segment display is formed sequentially larger as it goes from the upper and lower center position to the upper and lower end portions. As a result, the display by the seven segments at the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower center position can be made uniform as a whole. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the display of numbers by seven segments.

  Furthermore, the display of the seven segments formed on the left and right sides is formed such that the central part in the vertical direction is inclined to the central side in the horizontal direction. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the display of seven segments formed on the left and right sides.

  That is, the player's viewpoint is normally positioned at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. The segment display device 600 is disposed at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is positioned in front of the seven segments displayed in the center. Therefore, as the seven-segment display is viewed in a curved manner by the curved shape of the light transmitting portion 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 as being farther to the left and right from the player's viewpoint, Since the central portion in the vertical direction of the seven-segment display is formed to be inclined to the central side in the horizontal direction, it is difficult for the seven-segment display to be viewed in a curved manner from the viewpoint of the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the display of seven segments.

  Next, displacement modes of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (a) to G01 (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 58 (a), 59 (a) and 60 (a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIGS. 58 (b), 59 (a) and 60 (b) are FIGS. It is sectional drawing of 600 L of up-and-down displacement units in the LVIIIb-LVIIIb line | wire of (a).

  57 (a), 58 (a), and 58 (b), a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed in the retracted state is illustrated, and FIGS. 57 (b), 59 (a), and 59. In (b), a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed in an intermediate state is illustrated, and in FIGS. 57 (c), 60 (a), and 60 (b), the displacement member 670 is disposed in an overhanging state. The state is illustrated.

  Further, the retracted state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair at the top and bottom are separated from each other at the upper and lower sides, and the extension state of the displacement member 670 is a displacement disposed in the upper and lower pairs The member 670 is in contact with the upper and lower intermediate positions, and the intermediate state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed between the retracted state and the extended state.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 58, at a position where the displacement member 670 is in the retracted state, the displacement member 670 disposed at the upper side (upper side in FIG. 57) of the upper and lower pairs is the first position. When the link member 684 and the second link member 686 are positioned at the upper side, the decoration unit 672 is positioned at the upper side with the pivot hole 671a as the rotation axis.

  Further, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed at the upper position has a base end portion at the other end side (side to be inserted into the through hole 671d1) at the engagement position with the through hole 671d1. It is assumed. Thus, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP1 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the displacement member 670 in which the decoration unit 672 is disposed on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

  On the other hand, the displacement member 670 disposed at the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 57) of the upper and lower pairs is configured such that the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are positioned downward. The decoration unit 672 is positioned below as the rotation axis.

  The torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacing member 670 disposed below has a base end portion at the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1) at an engagement position with the through hole 671d1. It is assumed. Thus, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP2 can be increased. As a result, the decoration unit 672 can be easily displaced upward in the direction of gravity by the displacement member 670.

  In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the facing decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. In this case, as described above, three symbols displayed on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side in the vertical direction.

  From the state shown in FIG. 57A and FIG. 58, when a driving force for rotation is applied to the drive motor KM3, the large diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. As a result, the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are displaced to a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Therefore, the displacement member 670 connected to the insertion holes 684b and 686b of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 is rotationally displaced about the pivotal support hole 671a, as shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 59. The state shown in FIG. 57 (c) and FIG. 60 is displaced.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to an intermediate position, penetration of the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above The engagement position with the hole 671d1 is an intermediate position on the other end side (the side to be inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the retracted state by the change of the engagement position.

  Further, similarly to the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is inserted into the other end side (the through hole 671d1 Side position). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position of the retracted state by the change of the engagement position.

  In the intermediate state, an opening smaller than that in the retracted state is formed between the facing decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. . In this case, one symbol displayed on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side.

  Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 670 from the retracted state in which three symbols displayed on the inner reel 811 are displayed in the vertical direction to the intermediate state in which one drawing side on the inner reel 811 is displayed in the vertical direction. A plurality of effect modes can be formed, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, by making one drawing side displayed on the inner reel 811 displayed in the vertical direction, it is possible to make the player pay attention to one pattern. Therefore, since it is possible to clarify the part to be noticed, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  As shown in FIGS. 57C and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, penetration of the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above The engagement position with the hole 671d1 is the tip end position on the other end side (the side to be inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased as much as the torsion spring SP1 is deformed, and the bias of the torsion spring SP1 can be smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state as the engagement position is changed.

  Further, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side is also engaged with the through hole 671d1 at the other end side (the through hole 671d1 is inserted. End position). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased as much as the torsion spring SP2 is deformed, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state as the engagement position is changed.

  That is, the biasing force of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made non-linear with the displacement of the displacement member 670. Thus, depending on the displacement position of the displacement member 670, the necessary biasing force can be easily applied from the torsion springs SP1 and SP2. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

  In the overhang state, the decoration units 672 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are abutted at the vertical middle position of the upper and lower displacement units 600L. In this case, the decoration unit 672 is disposed on the front side of the decoration symbol display device 800, and can make the display of the decoration symbol display device 800 invisible from the player side (front side).

  Therefore, with the displacement member 670 in the extended state, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced, and thereafter, the displacement member 670 is displaced to the intermediate state or the retracted state, and the symbols are aligned with the player ( It is easy to give a sense of expectation that the jackpot is drawn. As a result, the player's interest can be enhanced.

  Although in the above embodiment, the displacement members 670 arranged in the upper and lower pair are displaced by the same amount, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the two drive motors KM3 is rotationally driven. It is also possible to displace the displacement members 670 arranged in the upper and lower pair only in one side to the position of the intermediate state or the overhang state.

  Further, the maximum displacement amount of the displacement members 670 disposed in the upper and lower pair is not set at the middle position, and can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. That is, in the state in which the pair of displacement members 670 are in contact with each other, they are vertically displaceable.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described. 61 to 63 are schematic views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 61 to 63, transition states of the displacement member 670 are illustrated in order.

  61 to 63, U is given to the end of the reference numeral of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670, and the lower side of the vertical displacement unit 600L. The end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 disposed on the side and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670 will be given with the symbol D.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the vertical displacement unit 600L, extension members 671 of the displacement member 670 are disposed on the left and right sides. The pair of extending members 671 has a driven side to which the drive force of the drive motor KM3 is transmitted through the connecting rod 681 and a drive side to which the drive force of the drive motor KM3 is transmitted by the projection 683b of the large diameter gear 683. It is linked to either one.

  As shown in FIG. 62, when the displacement members 670 arranged vertically are displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

  As shown in FIG. 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 62, it is possible to displace in the vertical direction with the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 in contact with each other. .

  Here, the first displacement member (decorative unit 672U) and the first displacement member are formed so as to be displaceable in opposite directions and in directions of approaching or separating, and in a state where opposing sides are in contact with each other. A gaming machine provided with two displacement members (decorative unit 672D) is known. According to this gaming machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to the position where the opposite sides abut, an object (for example, the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member) And shielding the liquid crystal display device and the rendering member, and displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the direction away from each other, so that the shielding is released along with the displacement and the object can be viewed. Can be performed. Further, while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) to maintain shielding of the object. Alternatively, an effect before releasing the shielding (an effect for focusing on the releasing operation of the shielding) can be performed.

  However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is difficult to bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of component members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed in the When a gap is formed between the opposite sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the effect of presentation is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base member 660 and the drive unit 680U and the drive unit 680D for displaceably supporting the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D on the base member 660 are provided. The opposite side of the decoration unit 672D opposite to the other side of the decoration unit 672D in which the aspect is biased to one side of the opposite side of the decoration unit 672U and is in contact with one side of the opposite side of the decoration unit 672U. Since the support mode of the drive means 680D is biased to one side, the support mode of the drive means 680U and the support mode of the drive means 680D are in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact. To the opposite side (the side rotated 180 ° around the center of one side and the other side of the opposite side) It is possible to 倚. Thereby, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily adhered to each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed (see FIG. 63).

  In the present embodiment, since the number of components is different on one side and the other side (both sides in the left-right direction), the driving force transmitted to the left and right of the decoration unit 672 is different. , You can align your high rigidity side (low side) with the low rigidity side (high side) of the other. Therefore, when the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D each push (advance) the other on the high rigidity side and the low rigidity side. In this case, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retracting) the other party. As a result, the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily attached to each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

  The driving means 680U transmits the driving force of the driving motor KM3U to the driving motor KM3U generating the driving force, the pair of extending members 671U connecting the decoration unit 672U to the base member, and the pair of extending members 671U. And the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U, which are different from each other, and the drive means 680D includes a drive motor KM3D generating a driving force, and a pair of extensions connecting the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660. Since the member 671U and the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D configured to transmit the driving force of the drive motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U and to be different from each other, the decoration unit 672U and Makes the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672D adhere closely Can, it is possible to suppress the gap formed between the opposing sides each other.

  That is, in the state in which the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D each have, for example, a side with a large driving force or a transmission timing of the driving force ahead While pushing (moving forward) the other party, it is possible to form a state in which the small driving force side or the transmission timing of the driving force receives the other party (backs up) on the later side. As a result, the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily attached to each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

  The extension members 671U and 671D are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end is connected to the decoration unit 672U or the decoration unit 672D and the other end is coaxially rotated to the base member 660. Since it is pivotally supported, even when utilizing the bias of the support mode when making the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D reciprocate in the same direction while bringing their opposite sides into contact with each other, the opposite sides do not It can be easy to maintain the connected state.

  Further, the extending member 671U or the extending member 671D is provided with an elastic member 671f formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and in a state where the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D abut against each other, Since the body is interposed between the extending member 671U and the extending member 671 in an elastically compressed state, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D reciprocate in the same direction while bringing their opposite sides into contact with each other. Even in the case of utilizing the bias of the support mode at the time of setting, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposite sides are in contact with each other.

  Further, as described above, the drive means 680U includes a drive motor KM3U generating a driving force, a pair of extending members 671U driven by the drive motor KM3U and connecting the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and The drive means 680D is driven by the drive motor KM3D for generating a drive force and the drive motor KM3D, and the decoration unit 672D is provided with two torsion springs SP1 for applying different biasing forces to the pair of extended members 671U. A pair of extending members 671D connecting the base member 660 to each other and two torsion springs SP2 applying different biasing forces to the pair of extending members 671D, so that the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D face each other. It is easy to make the sides adhere to each other, and between the opposite sides It can be suppressed gap is formed.

  That is, in a state in which the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D, for example, push (advance) the other on the side with large urging force. On the side with a smaller power, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retracting) the other party. As a result, the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily attached to each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

  The two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration as each other. That is, the biasing forces to be applied to the pair of extending members 671U may be made different from each other by the positions at which the biasing forces are applied being different from one another or the elastic deformation amounts being different from one another. The same applies to the two torsion springs SP2.

  Furthermore, the drive means 680U includes a drive motor KM3U generating a drive force, a pair of extending members 671U driven by the drive motor KM3U and connecting the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and the pair of extending members The drive means 680D is driven by a drive motor KM3D for generating a drive force and the drive motor KM3D and has a base unit for the decoration unit 672D. Since the pair of extending members 671D connected to 660 and the second biasing member for applying a biasing force to one of the pair of extending members 671D, the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are opposed to each other. Can be made to adhere easily and it can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between opposing sides.

  That is, in a state in which the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D, for example, push (advance) the other on the side where the biasing force is applied. On the side where the biasing force is not acted, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retracting) the other party. As a result, the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily attached to each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

  As described above, one leg is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671U, and the other leg is connected to the base member 660, and the biasing force in the direction to make the decoration unit 672U approach the decoration unit 672D. Since the torsion spring SP1 to be applied is provided, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced in the direction toward the decoration unit 672D, the driving force of the drive motor KM3U necessary for rotating the extension member 671U It can be assisted by the biasing force. Therefore, for example, when displacing the decoration unit 672U from the retracted position away from the decoration unit 672D to the abutting position in contact with the decoration unit 672D from the stopped state, the displacement can be smoothly started.

  In this case, as the extension member 671U is rotated in the direction to move the decoration unit 672U closer to the decoration unit 672D, one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the connecting position of the extension member 671U or the other leg of the torsion spring SP1 Since at least one of the connection position with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the decoration unit 672U is moved in the direction to move the decoration unit 672U closer to the decoration unit 672D because the distance from the winding portion to the force application position becomes longer. We can weaken the power. Therefore, for example, when stopping decoration unit 672U made to approach decoration unit 672D, since stop of the displacement can be performed certainly, the damage accompanying a collision can be controlled. Further, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocation can be suppressed, thereby increasing the displacement speed of the reciprocation. It is possible to improve the stage effect.

  On the other hand, a torsion spring formed as a torsion spring and having one leg connected to the extending member 671D and the other leg connected to the base member to apply a biasing force in a direction to move the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U Spring SP2 is provided, and as extension member 671D is rotated in a direction to bring decoration unit 672D closer to decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of extension spring 671D and the extension member 671D or the other of torsion spring SP2 Since at least one of the connection positions of the leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the torsion spring SP2 exerts the same effect as the torsion spring SP1. In particular, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction in a state where the opposite sides are in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocation can be suppressed in both, which is particularly effective. In addition, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are at the same height (arranged at the gravity direction position), and the contact position of both is the highest position (or lowest position) in the gravity direction and both are separated positions The configuration of the torsion spring SP1 and the torsion spring SP2 is particularly effective when (the retracted position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the direction of gravity.

  Since the decoration unit 672U is brought close to the decoration unit 672D by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force in the direction to displace the decoration unit 672U upward in the direction of gravity as the decoration unit 672U is positioned lower in the direction of gravity. The strength can be increased (that is, as the decoration unit 672U is positioned higher in the gravity direction, the biasing force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U in the gravity direction can be reduced).

  Therefore, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced (lifted) from the stopped state toward the upward direction of gravity, the displacement (lift) can be smoothly started, and when the decoration unit 672U that has been lifted is stopped. Can stop the displacement not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the biasing force. As a result, damage due to a collision with the decoration unit 672D can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the decoration unit 672U displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened, and the biasing force is opposed to the action of gravity which is intended to continue the descent. Can. As a result, the decoration unit 672U can be reliably stopped.

  A torsion spring SP2 formed as a torsion spring, wherein one leg is connected to the extension member 671D and the other leg is connected to the base member 660, and applies a biasing force in a direction to move the decoration unit 672D away from the decoration unit 672U. And since the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by displacement upward in the gravity direction, when the decoration unit 672D is displaced in a direction away from the decoration unit 672U, ie, the decoration unit 672D is in the gravity direction When it is necessary to displace (rise) against, the drive force of the drive motor KM3D necessary to rotate the extension member 671U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

  In this case, as the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction to move the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U, one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the connecting position of the extension member 671D or the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 Since at least one of the connection position with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by an increase in the distance from the winding portion to the force application position (gravity direction It is possible to weaken the biasing force in the upward direction). Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocation can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocation displacement The effect can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 64, the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the projections 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 are formed in a mountain shape inclined to both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a has been described, but in the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment The protrusions 2812 a are formed in a curved hemispherical shape. The same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 64 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotation member 2812 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation member 2812 taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 64 (a) corresponds to FIG. 36 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 64, the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812 is formed with a projection 2812a1 projecting toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

  The protrusion 2812a1 is formed to be curved in a bowl shape. Thus, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed air (wind) collides with the edge portion 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 to flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thus, dust stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown away. As a result, adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the protrusion 2812a1 of the second embodiment is formed to be bent in a bowl shape, its rigidity can be made higher than that of the protrusion 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suppress breakage of the protrusion 2812a when the tip of the protrusion 2812a1 abuts against the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, the outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 812a1 is formed on the rotation member 812 has been described, but in the second embodiment, the protrusion 3824a is formed on the edge portion 824. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 66 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 66 (b) is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, at an edge 824 on the extension of the spoke 3822 of the outer reel unit 820, a protrusion 3824a is formed which protrudes toward the rotating member 812 of the inner reel unit 810. The protrusions 3824 a are formed at the outer (outer reel 821 side) end of each spoke 3822.

  The protrusions 3824 a are formed to be inclined on both sides along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the opposing inner reel unit 810, and flows in between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thus, dust stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown away. As a result, adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotation member 812 is formed in a mountain shape in which both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. However, the rotation member 4812 of the fourth embodiment The projections 4812a formed on the bottom of the hub 812 are formed to be inclined with respect to the radial direction of the hub 812a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 68 (a) is a partially enlarged view of a rotating member 4812, and FIG. 68 (b) is a cross-sectional view of FIG. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the rotatable member 4812 taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with a projection 4812a1 projecting toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

  The protrusion 4812 a 1 is formed in a rectangular shape in a side view, and is formed in a mode in which the longitudinal direction thereof intersects with the radial direction of the hub 812 a. That is, the protrusions 4812a1 are formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radial outer end to the radial inner end of the hub 812a. In addition, the inclination direction is formed to be inclined toward the normal rotation direction side of the inner reel unit 810.

  Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the edge portion 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 to flow into the gap between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Thus, dust stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown away. As a result, adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed.

  Further, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radial outer end to the radial inner end of the hub 812a, and the inclination direction is the normal rotation of the inner reel unit 810 Since it is on the direction side, the wind can be easily generated by the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. As a result, adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed.

  That is, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to be light transmissive, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810, It is possible to make the player visually recognize the variation of the symbol accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 through the outer reel unit 820. In this case, the projection 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, that is, the projection 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 whose number of rotations is larger than that of the outer reel unit 820. In the effect by the rotation of the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, an inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the spokes 812 c of the inner reel unit 810 are formed to be inclined toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward, but the fifth embodiment In this case, the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are formed to be inclined to the side opposite to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as going radially outward. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 (a) is a partial enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG. 70 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular member 813 taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a). In the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment, the backlight unit 830 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in the inner reel unit 5810 in the fifth embodiment, the spokes 812 c of the rotating member 5812 are inclined to the side opposite to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as it goes radially outward. It is formed. Therefore, the inclination direction of the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the inclination direction of the spokes 812 c of the inner reel unit 810 are left-right symmetric.

  Further, a projection 5813a is formed on the surface of the annular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810 facing the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 so as to protrude (see FIG. 70). A plurality of protrusions 5813 a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular member 813.

  The protrusions 5813 a are formed in a mountain shape that inclines on both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813. Thus, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the extruded air (wind) collides with the edge portion 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 to flow into the gap between the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel. Thus, dust stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown away. As a result, adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed.

  Here, when the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812 c of the inner reel unit 810 are arranged on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800, the facing interval (between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820) In order to prevent the air from being sufficiently sent to the space), the drive motors KM1 and KM2 for driving the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can not be sufficiently cooled, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 fail. There was a fear.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection 5813a can generate a flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel, so the air flow Thus, it is possible to make it easy to suction air from the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800. Accordingly, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. As a result, since the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, failure of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 is formed only on the inner reel unit 810, but in the sixth embodiment, the protrusions 6812a1 and 6824a are formed on the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the sixth embodiment. 72 (a) is a partial enlarged view of the rotation member 6812, and FIG. 72 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation member 6812 taken along line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72 (a). FIG. 73 (a) is a partial enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 73 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 73 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed with a projection 6812a1 projecting toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Further, the protrusion 6812a1 is formed in a mountain shape in which both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

  At an edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820, a protrusion 6824a is formed which protrudes toward the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812. The protrusions 6824 a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Further, the protrusions 6824 a are formed in a mountain shape in which both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.

  The protrusion 6812a1 is formed radially inward of the rotating member 6812 than the protrusion 6824a. Thus, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the protrusion 6812a1 can be prevented from colliding with the protrusion 6824a.

  Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, a wind can be generated by the protrusions 6812a1 and the protrusions 6824a. That is, the wind can be generated by rotating one of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820.

  Further, in this case, the air pushed to either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can collide with either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a, so that the flow of air can be further restricted. Thus, the flow of air introduced between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel can be made faster. Thus, dust stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown away. As a result, adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed.

  That is, in the sixth embodiment, since the projections 8624a and the projections 6812a are provided at different positions in the radial direction on the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a, the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is provided. Regardless of which of the two is rotated, the projections 8624a and the projections 6812a can be circumferentially displaced between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure. Therefore, in the effect by the rotation of the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased.

  Inclined surfaces are formed on the surfaces of the projections 6812a1 and the projections 6824a which are radially opposed to each other. Thereby, air resistance when air flows in the radial direction can be reduced. As a result, dust stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be easily blown away.

  Furthermore, the arrangement interval of the protrusions 6812a1 in the circumferential direction and the arrangement interval of the protrusions 6824a in the circumferential direction are formed at different intervals. Accordingly, it is possible to shift the position where the projection 6812a1 and the projection 6824a overlap in the radial direction. Therefore, the radial position of the projections 6812a1 and the projections 6824a allows the air to be compressed at multiple positions. As a result, since the projections 6812a1 and the projections 6824a overlap in the radial direction and air is compressed, it is possible to suppress that the rotational speeds of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77, a rotating member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the first motorized parts 520 are driven symmetrically in the same manner is described. However, in the seventh embodiment, the driving of the first motorized goods 520 is driven differently on the left and right. Ru. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 (a) is a front view of the rotation member 7533 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 74 (b) is a side view of the rotation member 7533.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in the rotary member 7533, two plate-like members formed substantially in L-shape in side view are arranged side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. It is formed by being connected by In addition, the plate-like members disposed at the left and right ends are disposed so that the bending angle at which they are bent in a substantially L shape in the side view shape is different between the left and the right. In the seventh embodiment, the bending angle of the L-shape of the plate-like body formed on the left side in front view is set larger than the bending angle of the L-shape of the plate-like body formed on the right side in front view.

  Therefore, the drive portion 7533d formed by being recessed on the other end side (left side in FIG. 74B) of the rotation member 7533 is formed at different positions in the vertical direction on the left and right. Further, the width of the recessed portion (the width in the vertical direction on the left side of FIG. 74B) of the drive portion 7533d is formed larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 523 formed on the first motorized part 520, and the inside of the drive portion 7533d The protrusions 523 are slidably formed.

  In addition, the width dimension (dimension between opposing sides of the outer surfaces of the two plate-like members) in the front view left-right direction of the rotary member 7533 is smaller than the dimension between opposing sides inside the two first protrusions 532 b of the sliding member 532 It is set. Thereby, the rotation member 533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532 b of the slide member 532 opposite to each other.

  Further, in the front view, in the rotary member 7533, the dimension between the opposing plate members on the left and right is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 7533 (between the facing of the two plate members).

  The rotation member 7533 has a rotation shaft 533c which protrudes to both sides in the left and right directions from a bent portion of an L shape in side view, a protrusion 533b which protrudes to both sides in the left and right directions from an end on one end side of the L shape in side view, It is mainly provided with the drive part 7533 d formed by being recessedly provided at the tip on the other end side of the L-shape.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 to FIG. 76, the drive aspect of the first motorized product 520 of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (c) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first motorized workpiece 520. FIG. 76 (a) to 76 (c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first motor-operated part 520. FIG.

  FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (a) show the first state of the first motorized part 520, and FIGS. 75 (c) and 76 (c) show the second state of the first motorized part 520, FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b) illustrate states in which the first motor-operated part 520 is positioned between the first state and the second state. Further, FIGS. 75 and 76 illustrate a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are viewed as transparent.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (a), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 projects from the inside of the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is on the front side (FIG. 75 (a) And the drive unit 7533d is positioned downward. As a result, the projection 523 of the first motor-operated part 520 is pushed downward to be in the first state.

  In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the right drive unit 7533 d and the upper side (the upper side in FIG. 75A) of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R. This is because the center of gravity of the right wing member 520R is switched to the left side in a front view with respect to the rotation axis (the through hole 521R) while pushing down the projection 523R to a fixed position by the drive portion 7533d to bring the right wing member 520R into the first state. It is formed by rotating the right wing member 520R to its first state by its own weight.

  Further, a gap is formed between the inside of the left driving portion 7533 d and the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 75A) of the protrusion 523L of the left wing member 520L.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the inside of the main body 531a, the projection 533b of the rotating member 533 is on the back side (FIG. And the drive unit 7533d is lifted upward. Thereby, the first motorized product 520 is pushed up and rotated the projection 523.

  In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive unit 7533 d and the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 75A) of the protrusion 523L of the left wing member 520L. When the rotation member 533 is rotated (the drive unit 533d is lifted), the engagement between the left drive unit 7533d and the protrusion 523L is delayed by the gap. Therefore, the start of the displacement of the right wing member 520R to the second state is quicker.

  Then, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further drawn into the main body portion 531a through the states shown in FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b), the rotation member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. Therefore, the drive portion 7533d of the rotation member 533 is lifted upward, and the first motor-operated part 520 is brought into the second state shown in FIGS. 76 (c) and 76 (c).

  In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive unit 7533 d and the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 75C) of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R. This is because the center of gravity of the left wing member 520L is switched to the left side in a front view with respect to the rotation axis (the through hole 521L) while pushing up the projection 523L to a fixed position by the drive portion 7533d to bring the left wing member 520L into the second state. It is formed by rotating the left wing member 520L to its first state by its own weight.

  In addition, a gap is formed between the inside of the drive unit 7533d on the right side and the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 75A) of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R.

  Therefore, when displacing the first motorized product 520 from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 520R can be started earlier, and the left wing member 520L is moved to the second state. It can be later than the right wing member 520R.

  The displacement from the second state shown in FIGS. 75 (c) and 76 (c) to the first state shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (c) is the displacement from the first state to the second state described above. Since it is only the opposite of that, its detailed explanation is omitted.

  Therefore, when displacing the first motorized product 520 from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L can be started earlier, and the right wing member 520R is moved to the first state. It can precede the left wing member 520L.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the case where the game ball enters the winning opening unit 500 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 77 (a) and 77 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

  77 (a) and 77 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 of FIG. 24 (b). 77 (a) and 77 (b) show a state in which the first motor-operated part 520 is being displaced from the second state to the first state.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), when the first motorized component 520 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L is started first. The displacement of the right wing member 520R to the first state is later than that of the left wing member 520L.

  That is, it is possible to instantaneously form a state in which only the right wing member 520R of the first motorized product 520 is opened. At this time, when the game ball enters from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is the front side by the bulging portion 524R (the lower side in FIG. 77A). You will be guided to Therefore, the game ball can easily collide with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

  The bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the front side, so it is easy for the gaming ball collided with the bulging portion 524L to bounce back to the back side. Therefore, the game ball entered from the right wing member 520R can be easily entered into the second winning opening 140.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the first motorized product 520 is displaced to the first state, the left wing member 520L on the side on which the bulging portion 524L is formed on the front side and the right wing member 520R on the opposite side By making the displacement later than the left wing member 520L, it is possible to smoothly send the game ball, which is entered during the displacement to the first state, to the second winning opening 140.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one wing member (one of wing members 520L and 520R) of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is disposed at the position where the closed state is formed and the other wing member Since the timing at which (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R) is arranged at the position where the closed state is formed is different, it is difficult to pinch the game ball between the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) Accordingly, the facing distance between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be narrowed accordingly. Therefore, the space required for arrangement of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 78 to 82, a rotating member 8533 of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the second protrusion 532c for restricting the ball entry of the game ball is formed on the slide member 532. However, in the eighth embodiment, the ball entry of the game ball is performed on the rotation member 8533. A second projection 8533 e for regulating is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 according to the eighth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and the rotation thereof. Mainly provided with a first case member 534 in which the member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be displaced inside and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534 It is formed.

  The sliding member 8532 is formed in a substantially E shape in a top view, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first members protruding from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a. The projection 532b is mainly provided with a third projection 532e located between the two first projections 532b and projecting to the front side.

  The slide member 8532 is formed such that the dimension in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 532a is smaller than the dimension in the left-right direction on the inner circumferential surface of the first case member 534. Thus, the sliding member 8532 can be accommodated and disposed inside the first case member 534.

  The third projection 8532 e can restrict the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when displacing the first motor-operated part 520 to the second state by being positioned at the upper part of the connecting portion 533 a of the rotating member 8533 described later. That is, the lower surface of the third protrusion 8532 e is formed above the connecting portion 533 a when the first motor-operated component 520 is in the first state.

  The rotating members 8533 are formed by arranging two plate-like members formed substantially in an L shape in side view with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and connecting the opposing ends on one end side by the connecting portion 533a. Ru. The gap between the two plate-like members of the rotating member 8533 is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, the gaming ball can be passed inside the rotating member 8533 (between the facing of the two plate-like members).

  In addition, the width dimension in the left-right direction of rotating member 8533 (the facing distance between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like members) is set smaller than the facing distance inside the two first protrusions 532b of sliding member 8532. Ru. Thus, the rotation member 8533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532 b of the slide member 8532 facing each other.

  The rotation member 8533 has a rotation shaft 533c which protrudes to both sides in the left and right directions from a bent portion of the side view substantially L-shaped, a protrusion 533b which protrudes to the both sides in the left and right directions from an end of one end side of the side view substantially L-shaped It is mainly provided with a drive portion 533d which is formed by being recessed at the end on the other end side of the L-shape, and a second projection 8533e which is protruded on the front side from the center position in the left-right direction .

  The second protrusion 8533 e is formed in a rod shape extending to the front side, and includes an erected wall 8533 e 1 bent downward and erected at the protruding leading end thereof. The upright wall 8533 e 1 is curved in a convex shape on the front side in a side view, and the bending axis thereof is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described. 79 (a) and 79 (b) are side views of the first motor-driven workpiece 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b) are front views of the first motor-driven workpiece 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 81 (a) and 81 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

  79 and 80, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are illustrated as being transparent. Further, in FIGS. 79 (a), 80 (a) and 81 (a), the state in which the first motorized part 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 79 (b), 80 (b) and 81. In (b), the state in which the first motorized product 520 is in the second state is illustrated. Further, FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body 531a, the projection 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pushed to the front side (left side in FIG. 79A). The drive unit 533d is positioned below. As a result, the projection 523 of the first motor-operated part 520 is pushed downward to be in the first state.

  Further, in a state in which the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the tip end of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward. In this case, a distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82A) from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 to the upper end face of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the gaming ball rolls on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and is thrown to the second case member 535 by the standing wall 8533e1.

  Further, in a state where the movable body 531 b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531 a, the third protrusion 8532 e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533 a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, when the first motorized product 520 is manipulated to be displaced to the second state, the rotation of the rotation member 8533 is restricted by the third projection 8532 e.

  In other words, the transmission mechanism has a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, and the transmission mechanism is in the open slide position (FIG. 79 (FIG. sliding member 8532 which is slidingly displaced between the position shown in b) and the closing sliding position (the position shown in FIG. 79A), and the opening rotation by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the opening sliding position It is rotated to the position to open the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, and is rotated to the closed rotation position by the slide displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the closed slide position to at least close the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. And a standing wall 8533e1 is disposed on the rotating member 8533, and the rotating member 8533 is in an open rotational position. The upright wall 8533e1 is disposed at the allowable position when it is rotated, and the upright wall 8533e1 is disposed at the restricted position when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the closed rotational position, and the sliding member 8532 is disposed at the closed sliding position In the state where the rotation member 8533 is disposed in the closed rotation position, the rotation of the rotation member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted by the engagement of the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532. It can be easily controlled that the game ball is illegally entered into the second winning opening.

  That is, from the state in which the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is closed, for example, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is forcibly opened from the outside by illegally opening the pair or the rotating member 8533 is directly operated Even if it is intended to rotate 8533 to the open position, the rotation of the rotary member 8533 to the open rotational position is restricted by the engagement of the rotary member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, so the standing wall 8533e1 is restricted. It can be maintained at the position (that is, it can be suppressed that the standing wall 8533e1 is illegally displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, the standing wall 8533e1 can restrict the game ball from being illegally inserted into the ball entrance.

  In addition, a third projection 8532e protruding from the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533), and a connecting portion 533a formed on the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533) so as to be engageable with the third projection 8532e. And since the third protrusion 8532e is projected along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member 8532, the slide displacement of the slide member 8532 is used to engage the third protrusion 8532e and the coupling portion 533a and the engagement thereof It is possible to switch between release of engagement and simplification of the structure.

  The portion to be engaged may be a surface (a sliding member 8532 or the other outer surface of the rotating member 8533) to which the third projection 8532e can abut (a hole or a recess where the third projection 8532e can be inserted) It may be a hole or a recessed portion provided in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533. That is, the third protrusion 8532 e may be any as long as the rotation of the rotating member 8533 can be restricted to the open rotation position by the contact of the third protrusion 8532 e with the connecting portion 533 a. In this case, the connecting portion 533a is preferably a hole or a recess. As the third projection 8532e is inserted into the connecting portion 533a, the space necessary for the arrangement of the third projection 8532e can be reduced, and miniaturization can be achieved, and by being inserted into the connecting portion 533a, This is because the third protrusion 8532e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access from the outside to the third protrusion 8532e can be made difficult.

  On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the inside of the main body 531a, the projection 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pulled back to the back side (right side in FIG. 79B), and the driving portion 533d is upward. Be displaced. As a result, the first motorized product 520 is brought into the second state in which the protrusion 533 b is pushed upward.

  Further, in a state where the movable body 531 b of the solenoid 531 is drawn into the inside of the main body portion 531 a, the third protrusion 8532 e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned on the back side of the connecting portion 533 a of the rotating member 8533. Thus, the restriction on the rotation of the rotation member 8533 is released. As a result, the rotation member 8533 can be rotated to displace the first motorized product 520.

  Therefore, the drive portion 533d of the rotation member 8533 rotates toward the closing rotation position, and the opening side contact portion 8533d1 that abuts and opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when being rotated toward the opening rotation position. And a closing side contact portion 8533d2 that abuts and closes the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when being pressed, so that the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside, so that rotation is prevented. External unauthorized access to the member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 can be made difficult.

  That is, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is displaced from the outside in the direction of forced open, the closing side contact portion 8533d2 of the rotary member 8533 is pressed by the wing members 520L and 520R, and the rotary member 8533 is moved to the open rotation position. I try to turn it. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotation member 8533 to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement of the rotation member 8533 and the slide member 8532, so that the displacement of the wing member is controlled on the closing side of the rotation member 8533. It can be regulated by the contact portion 8533d2. That is, displacement of the wing member from the outside in the direction of forced opening can be restricted. As a result, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside illegally, and unauthorized access from the outside to the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 can be made difficult.

  In a state in which the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the inside of the main body portion 531a, the rotating member 8533 is rotated, whereby the top end face of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1. The distance dimension L7 (see FIG. 82 (b)) to the end is made larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, it is possible to roll the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and throw the game ball entered in the second winning hole 140 to the second case member 535.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the case where the first motorized workpiece 520 is broken will be described. 82 (a) and 82 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 82 (a) and 82 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, in FIG. 14 (a), the state in which the first motorized part 520 is in the first state is illustrated, and in FIG. 14 (b), the state in which the first motorized part 520 is in the second state is illustrated. .

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a) and FIG. 82 (b), the protrusions 534L and 534R of the first motorized product 520 are broken from the base end by cheating or aged deterioration, etc., and the first motorized product 520 is When the state is changed to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, so the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward. Ru. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the gaming ball rolls on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and is thrown to the second case member 535 by the standing wall 8533e1.

  Therefore, in the state in which the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is closed or the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is opened from the outside, the arrangement of the standing wall 8533e1 is formed so as to be maintainable at the restricted position. It is possible to suppress the wall 8533e1 from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it can be easily controlled that the game ball is illegally entered into the second winning opening 140.

  That is, in the state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is closed or the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is opened from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated to set the standing tip of the standing wall 8533e1 (gravity The distance L6 from the lower side of the direction (the lower end in FIG. 20B) to the upper end face of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball . Therefore, even if the first electric character 520 is capable of sending the game ball to the second winning opening 140 due to the player's fraudulent action, the game ball enters the second winning hole 140 and rolls. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 can be caused to collide with the standing wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532 to stop the rolling of the game ball. As a result, when the first electric character 520 is put into the second state (the game ball can be thrown to the second winning opening 140) by the player's fraudulent action, the gaming ball is illegally sent to the second winning opening 140. It can be easy to regulate being thrown.

  Further, in this case, the standing wall 8533e1 for making the gaming ball unable to enter the second winning opening 140 can be formed continuously to the sliding member 8532 for displacing the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. There is no need for a separate member that restricts unauthorized entry into the winning opening 140. Accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e for restricting the ball entry of the gaming ball and the third protrusion 8532e for suppressing displacement of the second protrusion are integrated with the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 As a result, the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87, the drive unit 9530 of the ninth embodiment will be described. The eighth embodiment has described the case where the movement of the first motor-operated product 520 is restricted when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, but in the ninth embodiment, the solenoid is used. When the movable body 531b of 531 is projected from the main body 531a, the first motor-operated product 520 is movable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the drive unit 8530 according to the ninth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and rotation thereof. Mainly provided with a first case member 534 in which the member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 can be displaced inward and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534 It is formed.

  The rotating members 9533 are formed by arranging two plate-like members formed substantially in an L shape in a side view with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and connecting the opposing ends on one end side by the connecting portion 533a. Ru. The gap between the two plate-like members of the rotating member 9533 is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, the gaming ball can pass through the inside of the rotation member 9533 (between the facing of the two plate-like members).

  In addition, the width dimension in the left and right direction of the rotation member 9533 (dimension between opposing sides of the outer surfaces of the two plate-like members) is set smaller than the dimension between opposing sides inside the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. Ru. Thus, the rotation member 9533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532 b of the slide member 8532 facing each other.

  The rotation member 9533 has a rotation shaft 533c which protrudes to both sides in the left and right directions from a bent portion of an L shape in side view, a protrusion 533b which protrudes to both sides in the left and right direction from an end on one end side of the L shape in side view, At the other end of the L-shaped end, a projecting portion 9533d projecting to the front side and a second projection 8533e projecting to the front side from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 533a are mainly formed.

  The projecting portion 9533d is formed to project from the end on the front side, and has a length such that the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing members 520L and 520R can abut on the upper side (the upper part in FIG. 84A) Is set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described. 84 (a) and 84 (b) are side views of the first motor-driven workpiece 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 85 (a) and 85 (b) are front views of the first motor-operated part 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

  In FIGS. 84 and 85, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are illustrated as being transparent. Also, in FIGS. 84 (a), 85 (a) and 86 (a), the state in which the first motor-operated part 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 84 (b), 85 (b) and 86. In (b), the state in which the first motorized product 520 is in the second state is illustrated. Further, FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, in the state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body 531a, the projection 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pushed to the front side (left side in FIG. 84A). The projecting portion 9533 f is positioned downward. As a result, the projection 523 of the first motor-operated part 520 is pushed downward to be in the first state.

  In the ninth embodiment, a biasing spring (not shown) is disposed on the rotation shaft of the first motorized product 520, and the biasing force of the biasing spring causes the first motorized product 520 to move to the first state side. An urging force that rotates and displaces is always applied. Thereby, when the first motor-operated part 520 is displaced to the second state by a force other than the drive of the solenoid 531 (for example, swing of a pachinko machine), it can be suppressed from remaining in the second state.

  On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is drawn into the main body 531a, the projection 533b of the rotating member 8533 is drawn to the back side (right side in FIG. 79B), and the projecting portion 9533f is upward. Is displaced. As a result, the first motorized product 520 is brought into the second state in which the protrusion 533 b is pushed upward.

  In this case, the protrusion portion 5533f and the protrusions 523L and 523R of the first motorized product 520 always abut each other, whereby the first motorized product 520 can be maintained in the second state.

  Also, by projecting the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from the main body portion 531a from the second state and displacing the projecting portion 9533f downward, the first motorized product 520 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring and It is displaced to 1 state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of the case where the first motor-operated workpiece 520 is illegally operated. FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 87 (a) and 87 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 87 (a), the state in which the first motorized part 520 is in the first state is illustrated, and in FIG. 87 (b), the state in which the first motorized part 520 is in the second state is illustrated. .

  As shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b), in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the first motorized product 520 is operated by the player's fraudulent act. When the first state is changed to the second state, only the first motorized product 520 is rotationally displaced.

  Therefore, the tip end of the erected wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward, so the gaming ball rolls on the upper end surface of the erected portion 534b by the erected wall 8533e1 and the second case member It is possible to suppress being thrown to 535.

  In this case (in the state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a), as described above, the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. . Thus, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the standing wall 8533e1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the store side from being disadvantaged by the player's fraudulent acts.

  Further, in the ninth embodiment, the second projection 8533e for restricting the ball entry of the game ball and the third projection 8532e for suppressing displacement of the second projection are integrated with the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 As a result, the number of parts of drive unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to suppress the destruction of the first motorized product 520 due to the player's fraudulent act. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss on the store side due to the player's cheating.

  That is, in the ninth embodiment, a biasing spring for biasing the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction is provided, and the rotating member 9533 is paired with the wing members 520L, when being rotated toward the open rotational position. The pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed by the biasing force of the biasing spring when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the closing rotational position, and the projecting portion 9533f is provided to contact and open the 520R. When the wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly released from the outside, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are not in contact with the rotating member 9533, and the external force due to such forced opening is prevented from acting on the rotating member 9533 it can. As a result, breakage of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the rotating member 9533 or the sliding member 8532 can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an urging means which always exerts an urging force that rotationally displaces the first motorized part 520 to the first state side, a spring (torsion for urging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R in the closing direction by elastic recovery force) Not only the spring and the coil spring), but also a magnet that urges the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction by an adsorption force is exemplified.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91, a displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is nonlinearly displaced small (or large) according to the displacement of the displacement member 670 has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, the rotary member 10678 is displaced. Thus, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. Fig.88 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 10670 in 10th Embodiment, FIG.88 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 10670. FIG. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 10670. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment includes the extending member 671 and the extending member 10671 disposed to face the extending member 671 and the extending member 10671 thereof. And, a decoration unit 672 connected to the extending member 671 and a rotating member 10678 rotatably disposed on the extending member are mainly formed.

  The extension member 10671 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a front view, and protrudes to the left and the right in a longitudinal central position in the longitudinal side at a longitudinal support hole 671a penetrating in the left and right direction in the front view. And a rotary shaft 10671 e which is cylindrically formed on the side of the support hole 671 a with respect to the connection protrusion 671 b.

  The rotating member 10678 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a side view, and is disposed on the extending member 10671 in a state where the longitudinal direction thereof is substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side of the extending member 10671 in the side view.

  The rotation member 10678 has a shaft support hole 10678a penetrating in the left and right direction, a through hole 10678b formed in the circumferential direction of the shaft support hole 10671a of the extension member 10671 extending to one end side in the longitudinal direction, and the other end side in the longitudinal direction And an inclined surface 10678c which is formed by notching the side surface of the main body.

  The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotary shaft 10671e of the extension member 10671 is inserted, and the inner diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the rotary shaft 10671e. Therefore, the rotary member 10678 can be disposed rotatably in the extending member 10671 by inserting the rotary shaft 10671 e into the shaft support hole 10677 a and screwing the rotary shaft 10671 e to the rotary shaft 10671 e.

  The through hole 10678b is a hole into which the torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, the operation of the rotation member 10678 will be described. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 91 (a) and 91 (b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the range XCI of FIG.

  FIG. 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 58 (b). 91 (a) and 91 (b) show the state when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced, and in FIG. 91 (b), the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are in contact with each other. The cross section of is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the vertical displacement unit 600L in the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 670 is disposed on the upper side, and the displacement member 10670 is disposed on the lower side, and the shafts of the displacement members 670 and 10670 are provided. The axis of the support hole 671a is coaxially arranged. That is, in the first embodiment, the lower displacement member 670 of the displacement members 670 disposed in a pair in the up and down direction is changed to the displacement member 10670. The drive means of the displacement member 10670 is the same as the means for driving the displacement member 670 of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decoration units 672 of the displacement members 670 and 10670 arranged at the top and bottom are displaced in the direction in which they approach each other, the extension members 671 and 10671 are brought close to each other.

  In the state where the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the inclined surface 10678 c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side surface of the extending member 671. Thereby, the rotating member 10678 is rotated about the pivot hole 10678a in a state where the inclined surface 10678c is substantially parallel to the side surface of the extending member 671 (FIG. 91 (b), the rotating member 10678 is pivoted It is rotated counterclockwise around the hole 10678a).

  Therefore, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side across the inclined surface 10678c and the axial support hole 10678a is similarly rotated. By displacing the position of the through hole 10678b, the position where the through hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

  In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side to the proximal side of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the biasing force that acts on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2 can be increased.

  Therefore, when the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 acting on the displacement member 10670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced in a state in which the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, separation of contact between the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the extending member 10671 in which the rotating member 10678 is disposed is the driven side (the side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the driving means 680 for driving the displacement member 10670, the driving from the driving motor KM3 Where the driving force is reduced compared to the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683), the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is increased by the displacement of the rotating member 10678 to drive the driving. It can compensate for the lack of power. As a result, separation of contact between the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, the vertical displacement unit 11600L of the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the drive force is transmitted from both the left and right sides of the displacement member 670. However, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive force is transmitted from only one side of the displacement member 11670. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIGS. 92 to 94, similarly to FIGS. 61 to 63, U is added to the end of the reference numeral of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670. At the same time, the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670 will be given with the symbol D.

  The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. 92 to 94 are schematic views of the vertical displacement unit 11600L according to the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 92 to FIG. 94, transition states of the displacement member 11670 are sequentially illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is disposed on only one side. That is, in the first embodiment, the extending members 671 provided in a pair in left-right symmetry with the displacement member 670 are in a state in which the extending members 671 are provided in only one of them in the eleventh embodiment. Ru.

  In the eleventh embodiment, only the drive means 680 is formed on the drive side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683), and the extension member 671 is connected to the drive means on the drive side. Therefore, the extension members 671 of the displacement members 11670 disposed in the upper and lower displacement units 11600L in a pair at the top and bottom are disposed in the left and right opposite directions.

  As shown in FIG. 93, when the displacement members 11670 arranged at the top and bottom are displaced, the side surfaces of the respective decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the top and bottom center position of the top and bottom displacement unit 11600L.

  As shown in FIG. 94, by displacing both in the same direction from the state of FIG. 93, it is possible to displace in the vertical direction with the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 in contact with each other.

  In the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is disposed on one side, the drive of the decoration unit 672 on the opposite side to the drive side is delayed, and there is a fear that a gap is formed between the two decoration units 672. Since the extending member 671 is disposed on the top and bottom opposite sides, the end on the opposite side to the driving side of one decoration unit 672 is pushed by the end on the driving side of the other decoration unit 672. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

  In this case, it is preferable to delay the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672. By delaying the timing of driving of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

  Describing in detail, the decoration unit in which the drive-side end of the decoration unit 672, which has been driven earlier, is driven later by the timing of driving of the displacement member 11670 opposite to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 being advanced. The end opposite to the drive side of the 672 can be pushed out. On the other hand, the end opposite to the drive side of the decoration unit 672 driven earlier is brought into contact with the drive side end of the decoration unit 672 to be driven later with stronger force. As a result, when displacing the two displacement members 11670 with the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

  Further, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671) can be easily deformed by the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 being on one side. Therefore, the timing of driving of the displacement member 11670 opposite to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 is advanced to deform the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671) of each other, and the elastic force when the displacement returns Can be used to suppress the gap between the two decoration units 672.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the winning opening unit 500 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the thickness of the front base 511 and the back base 512 of the winning opening unit 500 is substantially constant, but in the eleventh embodiment, the thickness of the front base 511 and the back base 512 is the same. Partially changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 95 (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 95 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95 (a). In FIG. 95 (a), the front base 511 is seen as transparent and shown, and in FIG. 95 (b), the front base 511 is shown as opaque and shown. Also, in FIG. 95 (b), the rolling direction of the gaming balls rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1 as in FIG. 24 (b). Furthermore, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by the arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by the arrow B.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed to have partially different thicknesses in the front-rear direction (FIG. 95 (b) vertical direction) on the left and right with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween. That is, the upper right side of the second winning opening 140 is provided with a front side bulging portion 12511 f that bulges to the back side.

  In addition, the thickness of the back surface base 512 is formed so that the thickness in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 95B) is partially different between the left and right via the second winning opening 140. That is, a rear side bulging portion 12512 d that bulges to the back side at the upper left portion of the second winning opening 140 is provided.

  The front side bulging portion 12511 f and the back side bulging portion 12512 d are formed outside the displacement region of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. Thereby, the collision of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R with the front side bulging portion 12511f and the rear side bulging portion 12512d is suppressed.

  Further, the front side bulging portion 12511 f and the back side bulging portion 12512 d have their end portions in the left-right direction more than the top surfaces of the side surfaces 526L, 526R in the open state of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (FIG. 95 (b) Direction) is located outside. Thereby, the game ball which may flow down from the upstream side of the first motorized product 520 and may be thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R is made to collide with the front side bulging portion 12511f and the rear side bulging portion 12512d with certainty. Can.

  The front side bulging portion 12511 f is formed on the side surface facing the formation position in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R. In other words, the front-side bulging portion 12511 f is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the position where the bulging portion 524 R is formed in the front-rear direction.

  On the other hand, the back side bulging portion 12512 d is formed on the side surface opposed to the formation position in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L. In other words, the back side bulging portion 12512 d is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the bulging portion 524 L in the front-rear direction.

  As a result, the gaming ball flowing down the upper right side of the first motorized product 520 can collide with the front side bulging portion 12511 f and can be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the gaming ball flowing down the upper right side of the first motorized product 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be brought close to the back side. As a result, the gaming ball rolling on the side surface 526R can easily collide with the bulging portion 524R.

  On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first motorized product 520 can collide with the back side bulging portion 12512 d and can be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the gaming ball flowing down the upper left side of the first motorized product 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be brought close to the front side. As a result, the gaming ball rolling on the side surface 526L can easily collide with the bulging portion 524L.

  Therefore, by bringing the gaming balls guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R, such gaming balls can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning opening 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the game ball which has entered the guide surface of one wing member (one of wing members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of wing members 520L and 520R), The game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the other wing member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the game ball entering the guide surface of one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance to improve the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the ball feeding speed can be reduced by causing the game ball to be thrown to the wing members 520L and 520R to collide with the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d. Therefore, the rolling speed of the gaming ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced. As a result, the impact when it collides with the bulging portions 524L, 524R can be reduced, and breakage of the wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment is formed to include a protrusion that protrudes between the facing of the front base 511 and the rear base 512 of the first embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  96 (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 96 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 96 (a). In FIG. 96 (a), the front base 511 is seen as transparent and shown, and in FIG. 96 (b), the front base 511 is shown as opaque and shown. Also, in FIG. 96 (b), the rolling direction of the gaming balls rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1 as in FIG. 24 (b). Furthermore, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by the arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by the arrow B.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the front base 511 is formed with a protrusion 13511 g that protrudes to the back base 512 side on the left side of the second winning opening 140. In addition, the rear surface base 512 is provided with a protrusion 13512 e that protrudes to the front surface base 511 on the right side of the second winning opening 140.

  The protrusion 13511g and the protrusion 13512e are formed outside the displacement region of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. As a result, the collision of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R with the protrusion 13511g and the protrusion 13512e is suppressed.

  The protrusion 13511 g is formed on the same side as the formation position in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 524 R of the right wing member 520 R. On the other hand, the protrusion 13512 e is formed on the side surface facing the formation position of the bulging portion 524 L of the left wing member 520 L in the front-rear direction.

  As a result, the gaming ball flowing down the upper right of the first motorized product 520 can be made to collide with the protrusion 13511 g and can be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first motorized product 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be moved to the front side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first motorized product 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R, the game ball can hardly collide with the bulging portion 524R. As a result, breakage of the wing member 520R can be suppressed.

  In addition, the game ball which is thrown from the right side of the first motorized product 520 to the side surface 526R of the wing member 520R is thrown to the side surface 526R without colliding with the projection 13511g formed above the wing member 520R. . The game ball in this case can be guided to the back side by colliding with the bulging portion 524R when rolling the side surface 526R.

  On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first motorized product 520 can collide with the protrusion 13512 e and can be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first motorized product 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be moved to the back side. As a result, when the gaming ball flowing down the upper left side of the first motorized product 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L, the game ball can hardly collide with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, breakage of the wing member 520L can be suppressed.

  In addition, the game ball which is thrown from the left side of the first motorized product 520 to the side surface 526L of the wing member 520L is thrown to the side surface 526L without colliding with the projection 13512e formed above the wing member 520L. . In this case, when rolling the side surface 526L, the game ball can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulging portion 524L.

  Therefore, by bringing the gaming balls guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R, such gaming balls can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning opening 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the game ball which has entered the guide surface of one wing member (one of wing members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of wing members 520L and 520R), The game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the other wing member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the game ball entering the guide surface of one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance to improve the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, since the number of gaming balls colliding with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced by the projections 13511g and the projections 13512e, the durability of the wing members 520L and 520R can be improved.

  Next, wing members 14520L and 14520R (first variable device 14520) of a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The wing members 14520L and 14520R of the fourteenth embodiment are formed to have different width dimensions in the front-rear direction of the bulging portions 524L and 524R from the first embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a perspective front view of the left wing member 520L in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 97 (b) is a perspective front view of the right wing member 520R. 98 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 98 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member 520L taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98 (a). Fig. 98 is a schematic cross sectional view of the right wing member 520R taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in Fig. 98 (b).

  In FIG. 97 (a) and FIG. 97 (b), the oblique viewing direction in the left and right direction is illustrated as being opposite to the left and right. The cross-sectional view of FIG. 98 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24 (b). In FIG. 98 (a), the rolling direction of the gaming balls rolling on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line along with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1 as in FIG. 24 (b). Furthermore, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by the arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by the arrow B.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L is formed in a substantially triangular shape in a front view, and is formed in a size larger than the diameter of the gaming ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 14520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front and rear direction at the lower end in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and a back side from the vicinity of the through hole 521L A protrusion 523L protruding on the side, a recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the side of the through hole 521L, and a side surface of the facing surface of the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state 14526L and a bulging portion 14524L formed to project from the side surface 14526L.

  The side surface 14526L includes an inclined surface 14526L1 formed by being inclined upward from the substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the back surface, and a smooth surface 14526L2 formed on the front side from the substantially central position in the front-rear direction.

  The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed to be inclined downward toward the smooth surface 14526L2 from the rear surface side (the left side in FIG. 98B). As a result, among the game balls sent to the side surface 14256L, the game balls sent to the inclined surface 14526L1 can be guided to the smooth surface 1452L2 side by the downward inclination.

  Further, the bulging portion 14524L is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526L1 (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 98 (b)). The bulging portion 14524L is formed such that the width in the front-rear direction is smaller than half the front-rear width of the wing member 14520L. That is, the front-rear width of the bulging portion 15254L is smaller than the front-rear width of the bulging portion 14524L.

  As described above, since the gaming balls rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 of the gaming balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L are rolled on the smooth surface 14526L2 side, the game rolling on the side surface 14526L The probability of the ball colliding with the bulging portion 14524L can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed in a substantially triangular shape in a front view, and is formed in a dimension larger than the diameter of the gaming ball in the front-rear direction. The right wing member 14520R has a through hole 521R penetrating in the back and forth direction at the lower end in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521R, and the back side from the vicinity of the through hole 521R. And a recessed portion 525R recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R on the end surface on the side of the through hole 521R, and a side surface 14526R of the facing surface of the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state. And a bulging portion 14524R projecting from the side surface 14526R.

  The side surface 14526R includes an inclined surface 14526R1 formed by being inclined upward from the substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the back surface, and a smooth surface 14526R2 formed on the front side from the substantially central position in the front-rear direction.

  The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed to be inclined downward toward the smooth surface 14526R2 from the back surface side (right side in FIG. 98C). Thereby, among the gaming balls to be thrown to the side surface 14256R, the gaming balls to be thrown to the inclined surface 14526R1 can be guided to the smooth surface 1452R2 side by the downward inclination.

  Further, the bulging portion 14524R is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526R1 (the rear side in the drawing of FIG. 98B). The width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-rear direction is larger than half the front-rear width of the wing member 14520L. That is, the width in the front-rear direction of the inclined surface 14526R1 is larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 14524L. Accordingly, the front-rear width of the bulging portion 14524R of the right wing member 14520R is larger than the front-rear direction width of the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L.

  As described above, since the gaming ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526R1 of the gaming balls rolling on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R rolls to the smooth surface 14526R2 side, the game rolling on the side surface 14526R The probability of the ball colliding with the bulging portion 14524R can be reduced.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is formed in such a form that gaming balls flow down from the left side of the first motorized product 520 and are easily thrown by the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the open state wing members 520L, 520R. Ru. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, the first through gate 66 for setting the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the open state is disposed on the left side of the center frame 86, and the gaming ball is It is configured to be launched toward the left side. Thus, the game balls flowing down the game board 13 flow down the left side of the game board 13 as a whole and are thrown from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (a pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R) to the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R. It will be easier.

  Therefore, more game balls are thrown to the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L compared to the right wing member 14520R, the wear of the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L becomes faster, and the left wing member 14520L becomes easily broken. There was a point.

  On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, the inclined surfaces 14526L1 and 14526R1 are formed on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R, and the bulging portions 14524L and 14524R are formed on the inclined surfaces 14526L1 and 14526R1, and many game balls are thrown Because the bulging portions 14524L and 14524R are formed smaller in the front-rear direction, the probability of the game ball colliding with the bulging portions 14524L of the wing member 14520L on the side to which the ball is sent more is reduced. It is possible to suppress being done early. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the wing members 14520L and 14520R on the side where many game balls are thrown can be easily broken.

  Next, a variable winning device 15065 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. In the first embodiment, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed on the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. However, in the fifteenth embodiment, the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c are formed on the variable winning device 65. Be done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 99 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. FIG. 100 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13, and FIG. 100 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100 (a).

  99 (a) and 100 (a) correspond to the partially enlarged view of FIG. Further, FIG. 99 illustrates the closed state of the variable winning device 15065, and FIG. 100 illustrates the open state of the variable winning device 15065. Further, in FIG. 100 (b), the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolling on the side surface 15065a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1 similarly to FIG. 24 (b). Furthermore, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by the arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by the arrow B.

  Further, in the closed state of the variable winning device 15065, the plane of the variable winning device 15065 formed in the plate state is positioned substantially parallel to the plane on the front side of the gaming board 13, and the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area is specified winning. It is in a state where it is impossible to enter the mouth (large open mouth) 65a. On the other hand, with the open state of the variable winning device 15065, the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is positioned substantially orthogonal to the plane on the front side of the gaming board 13, and the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area is a specified winning opening (large opening) ) It is possible to enter the ball at 65a.

  As shown in FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, the variable winning device 15065 is formed in a plate-like body long to the left and right, and is disposed rotatably with respect to the game board 13 with one end on the back side as an axis. Further, the variable winning device 15065 is connected to a driving device (not shown) on the back side, and the driving force is applied to the driving device to displace the variable winning device 15065 between the closed position and the open position. It is made possible.

  Further, in the variable winning device 15065, two bulging portions 15065b and 15065c are formed to protrude on the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side in the open state. Furthermore, the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed to be inclined downward from the left and right sides toward the center. Thereby, the game ball sent to the side surface 15065a can be rolled toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a side, and can enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  The bulging portion 15065b is located on the left side in a front view of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and is formed to be connected to the end face on the front side in the open state (state of FIG. 100 (b)). The bulging portion 15065c is located on the right side in a front view of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and is formed to be connected to the end face on the back side in the alveolar state (state of FIG. 100 (b)).

  That is, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c are formed on the left and right sides with the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a interposed therebetween, and are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction. Thus, when the game ball is thrown to the left and right sides of the variable winning device 15065 in the open state, the game ball can be prevented from colliding in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and bouncing back to both left and right. .

  Explaining in detail, the game ball sent to the left side in a front view of the side surface 15065a collides with the bulging portion 15065b when being rolled to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a side and is guided to the back side Ru. On the other hand, the gaming ball, which is thrown to the right in the front view of the side surface 15065a, collides with the bulging portion 15065c when being rolled to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a side and is guided to the front side.

  Therefore, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c can displace the longitudinal direction position of the gaming ball which is fed from the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown on both the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a and the right and left game balls collide in front of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a, the rebound (repulsion) direction may be made the front and back direction. it can. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the gaming ball.

  In addition, when the game ball is thrown from one of the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a, the game ball is made to collide with the one side of the bulging portion 15065b or the bulging portion 15065c to displace the position in the front-rear direction. The game ball can be made to collide with the other of the bulging portion 15065 b or the bulging portion 15065 c when the front side of the is rolled in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the game ball sent from one side of the side surface 15065a rolls in front of the specified winning opening (large opening port) 65a and slips out to the other side of the side surface 15065a.

  The side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed to have a width equal to the width of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a or a width larger than the width of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and a pair of bulging portions The 15065 b and 15065 c are disposed at positions sandwiching the entrance in front view, and are disposed at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065 a) Therefore, by bringing the game balls guided (rolled) on the side surface 15065a into contact with the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c, such game balls can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the specific winning combination opening (large opening opening) 65a.

  In addition, one bulging portion 15065b, 15065c and the other bulging portion 15065b, 15065c are positioned in a direction orthogonal to the width direction of the variable winning device 15065 (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). If the game ball enters the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 from the one side (or the other side) in the width direction by being arranged differently, such a game ball is either of the pair of bulging portions 15065b and 15065c. It can be made to abut on either side. Therefore, the game ball entering from one side (or the other side) in the width direction to the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 passes through the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 and flows out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, engagement of the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 is made possible by the contact between the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a and the third projection 8532e. However, in the sixteenth embodiment, the connection is achieved. This is performed by inserting the third protrusion 16532e into the recess of the portion 533a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 101 (a) is a front view of the first motorized product 520 and the drive unit 8530 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 101 (b) is a first motorized product in the line CIb-CIb of FIG. 101 (a). Fig. 101 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the drive unit 8520 and the drive unit 8530. Fig. 101 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the first motorized workpiece 520 and the drive unit 8530 along the line CIc-CIc in Fig. 101 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the connecting portion 533a of the rotary member 8533 of the sixteenth embodiment, a recessed portion 16533a1 is formed substantially at the center position in the left-right direction from the back side toward the front side. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape in a rear view.

  In addition, the third protrusion 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed to protrude at a position facing the recessed portion 16533a1 described above in the front-rear direction. The front view shape of the third protrusion 16532e is formed in a horizontally long rectangle slightly smaller than the recessed portion 16533a1, and the tip is formed in a tapered shape.

  Thus, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is in the closed state, the third protrusion 16532e can be accommodated inside the recessed portion 16533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged.

  Further, in this case, since the engaging portion is the recessed portion 16533a1, since the third protrusion 16532e is inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1, the space necessary for the arrangement of the third protrusion 16532e is suppressed, and the size is reduced. Since the third protrusion 16532e can be shielded from the outside by being inserted into the recess 16533a1, the unauthorized access from the outside to the third protrusion 16532e can be made difficult.

  Next, a sliding member 15732 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102 to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the standing wall 532c1 is positioned more upstream than the sensor device SE1 disposed on the flow-down path of the gaming ball having entered the second winning opening 140 has been described, In the seventeenth embodiment, a case where the standing wall 17532c1 is disposed downstream of the sensor device SE1 will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are side views of the first motor-operated workpiece 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the seventeenth embodiment. FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

  In FIG. 102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are seen as transparent and illustrated. In FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a), the first motorized component 520 is in the closed state, and in FIGS. 102 (b) and 102 (b), the first motorized component 520 is in the open state. The illustrated states are illustrated respectively. Further, FIGS. 102 (a) and 102 (b) correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, in the sliding member 17532 in the seventeenth embodiment, a standing wall 17532c1 is formed to project from the lower side (lower side in FIG. 102A) of the connecting portion 532a. The upright wall 17532c1 has an upright wall 17532c1 whose front end is set to a position beyond the lower end face of the second case member 535 and whose front end is bent toward the front side.

  The vertical length of the vertical wall 17532c1 on the front side is such that the upper and lower side surfaces are below the sensor device SE1 disposed in the second case member 535 when the first motorized part 520 is in the closed state. Set to the position length.

  Further, in the second case member 535, an opening 17535b which is through-molded in the vertical direction is formed (see FIG. 103A). The second protrusion 17532 c is disposed in the state of being inserted inside the opening 17535 b.

  Furthermore, the opening width of the opening 17535 b in the front-rear direction is set larger than the slide width of the sliding member 17532 that slides in the front-rear direction (the drive width of the solenoid 531). Accordingly, the sliding member 17532 can be slid in the front-rear direction in a state where the second protrusion 17532 c is inserted inside the opening 17535 b.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), when the first motorized part 520 is put in the closed state, the standing wall 17532c1 is located on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1, It is possible to regulate the insertion of the ball. On the other hand, when the first motorized product 520 is in the open state, the standing wall 17532c1 is disposed on the back side of the opening of the sensor device SE1 (the hole for detecting passage of the game ball). As a result, when the first motor-operated part 520 is in the open state, the game ball can be inserted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the case where the first motorized product is forced to be in the second state due to the player's fraud will be described. FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b) correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), respectively. In FIG. 104 (a), the first motorized part 520 is in the closed state, and in FIG. 104 (b), the state in which the first motorized part 520 is in the open state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b), when the first motorized component 520 is put in the closed state, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is forcibly opened by the player's fraudulent act. When the first motorized product 520 is in the open state, the front-rear direction position of the sliding member 17532 is in the same position as the closed state, as in the first embodiment.

  Therefore, when the first motorized product 520 is forced to be in the open state, the standing wall 17532c1 is disposed downstream of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the gaming ball having the gaming ball entered from the second winning opening 140 is stagnated on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1.

  In this case, the separation distance from the sensor device SE1 to the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is set to a dimension substantially matching the radius of the gaming ball. As a result, the gaming ball held on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is constantly detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first motorized product 520 has been opened fraudulently because the sensor device SE1 detects the gaming ball for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's cheating and to notify the store operator of the player's cheating.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment is provided with a sensor device SE1 for detecting the game ball entered in the second winning hole 140, and the standing wall 17532c1 has the restricted position downstream of the sensor device SE1. Since the gaming ball is regulated at a position where detection by the sensor device SE1 is possible, for example, when the wing members 520L, 520R are forcibly opened and the gaming ball is illegally introduced from the ball entry, the sensor device The state in which the SE1 has detected the gaming ball can be continued. Therefore, it can be detected that the game ball has flowed in illegally by determining whether the detection by the sensor device SE1 is continued beyond the predetermined time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the rotating member 18812 of the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, although the case where the projection 2812a1 formed on the rotating member 2812 is formed at a fixed distance in the radial direction from the axis of the hub 812a has been described, in the eighteenth embodiment, the projection 18812a1 is a hub They are formed at different radial distances from the axis of 812a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 105 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotation member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 105 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation member 18812 taken along line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment has a protrusion 18812a1 which protrudes in a hemispherical shape to the edge 824 side (see FIG. 35) of the outer reel unit 820 disposed opposite to it. We have multiple pieces.

  The projections 18812a1 are formed such that the radial distances from the axes of the adjacent projections 18812a and the hub 812a are different from each other. Thus, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the air flow generated by the first (the end located on the rotation side) protrusion 18812a1 is transferred to the second (the rotation backward side of the first protrusion 18812a1) protrusion 18812a1. You can easily make them collide. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the air flow can be easily generated. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the relationship among the accommodation unit 880, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. Although the case where the side wall portion 881 of the accommodation unit 880 is formed into a plate-like body has been described in the first embodiment, a plurality of openings are formed in the side wall portion 881 in the nineteenth embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 106 (a) and 12 (b) are cross-sectional views of the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the nineteenth embodiment. In FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), the state in which the outer reel unit 820 is shifted (rotationally displaced) is illustrated. Also, in FIG. 106 (b), the opening 19881 d formed in the side wall portion 881 is illustrated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (a), in the side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30 (a)) disposed on the left side in front view of the decorative symbol display device 800, a plurality of openings 19881d formed in the left and right direction are formed. Be done.

  The openings 19881 d are formed at predetermined intervals circumferentially around the rotation axes of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. The formation angles of the adjacent openings 19881 d are set to be substantially the same as the formation angles of the spokes 812 c of the inner reel unit 810 and the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820. Further, the opening dimension in the circumferential direction of the opening 19881 d is set smaller than the width dimension in the circumferential direction of the spokes 812 c and the spokes 822. Thus, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or spokes 812c) can be arranged next to the opening 19881d. it can. That is, the opening 19881 d can be covered by the spoke 822 (or the spoke 812 c) in a side view.

  Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated, it is possible to suppress the inflow of air from the opening 19812c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or spokes 812c) are arranged at circumferential positions different from the opening 19881d. be able to.

  This allows air to flow in from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated. That is, by making the inflow path of the air the shortest and reducing the air resistance, the air can be easily made to flow inside the decorative symbol display device 800 (the housing unit 880).

  Therefore, when an effect is made to rotate the inner reel unit 810 to decorate the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and make the other player visually recognize the other symbol, the inflow of air from the opening 19881d is restricted to make the inner reel 811 The display can be easily made visible to the player. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, cleaning of the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is permitted by allowing inflow of intake air from the opening 19881d. It is easy to do.

  As mentioned above, although this invention was demonstrated based on said each embodiment, this invention is not limited at all to said each embodiment, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. Is easily guessable.

  In each of the embodiments described above, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced or combined with part or all of one or more other embodiments to constitute a gaming machine.

  In the first embodiment, although the case where the portions other than the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the pair of left and right wing members 520L, 520R are formed in left-right symmetry is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing members 520L and 520R may be formed on the rotary member 533 side, and the wing members 520L and 520R may have the same shape. In this case, since the wing members 520L and 520R can be formed of the same part, the manufacturing cost of the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced by sharing the parts.

  Although the case where the inclined portion 625a of the reflection member 625 is formed to be a smooth surface has been described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined portion 625a may be curved to be convex toward the light transmitting portion 621a. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed, and can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, it is possible to make the distribution of the amount of light visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a uniform.

  In the first and eleventh embodiments, as the aspect in which the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, the case where the number of arranged components is different is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, those having different rigidity (dimensions of constituent members, materials, etc.) between one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member), and the driving force (size, etc.) transmitted between the one side and the other side. Transmission time, transmission timing, etc.), one side and the other side, connection state of components (for example, number of connected parts, amount of rattling of connected parts, etc.) different, one side and the other side It may be one that is different in ease of displacement to the other (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance (displacement or rotation), etc.), or a combination thereof.

  Thus, when the support state is biased to one side by the rigidity of the component members, the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D have their own high rigidity side (low side) as the low rigidity side (high side) of the other. You can head to Therefore, when the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D each push (advance) the other on the high rigidity side and the low rigidity side. In this case, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retracting) the other party. As a result, the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily attached to each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the first motor-operated part 520 is displaced to the closed state by the biasing spring has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, by arranging a magnetic body inside the first motorized part 520 and arranging a magnet on the front base 511 or the back base 512, the magnetic force of the magnet displaces the first motorized part 520 to the closed state. It may be something that

  In the first and eleventh embodiments, as the aspect in which the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, the case where the number of arranged components is different is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, as an aspect in which the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) are configured to be different from each other, the rigidity of the component (the size of the component, the number of the components) It may be different in material, etc., different in connection state between constituent members (for example, the number of connected parts, the amount of rattling of connected parts, etc.), or a combination of these. Due to the difference between these configurations, the magnitude and transmission timing of the driving force to be transmitted will be different, and the supporting modes of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D are respectively biased to one side.

  Although the case where the standing wall 532c1 is formed slidably on the inside of the first case member 534 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the inside of the main body 531a, the standing wall 532c1 may be protruded from the inside of the second winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning opening 140, so even if the wing members 520L and 520R are opened due to fraud, the inside of the second winning opening 140 It can suppress that a game ball is stagnated in front of wall 532c1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unfair.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments described above, the gaming balls are guided in the front-rear direction by changing the side shape between the facing front base 511 and the back base 512, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. .

  For example, a magnet may be provided inside the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the game ball may be guided in the front-rear direction by the attraction force of the magnet. As a result, since it is not necessary to narrow the space between the front base 511 and the back base 512, it is possible to suppress the gaming ball from being held between the front base 511 and the back base 512. In this case, it is preferable that the adsorptive power of the magnet be such a adsorptive power that can not hold the gaming ball on the adsorptive surface of the magnet. Thus, it can be suppressed that the gaming balls are adsorbed to the side surfaces of the front base 511 and the back base 512.

  In the second and eighteenth embodiments, the case where the plurality of protrusions 2812a1 and 18812a1 are formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of recessed grooves may be formed on the side opposite to the edge 824 of the hub 812a. Also in this case, the air flow can be generated by the concavo-convex shape of the groove as in the second and eighteenth embodiments. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  In the fifteenth embodiment described above, the variable winning device 15065 is disposed rotatably displacing the gaming board 13. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning device 15065 is disposed so as to be slide-displaceable in the front-rear direction with respect to the gaming board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning device 15065 is immersed in the gaming board 13 and the game ball is held in the specific winning opening 65a. In the open state, the variable winning device 15065 may be extended to the front side of the game board 13 so that the game ball can enter the specified winning opening 65a.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and has a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
In the gaming machine provided with a ball entry port in which the game ball is formed so as to be capable of entering the ball and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entry port and being displaceable. A pair of projecting portions protruding from the guiding surface and formed so as to be able to abut the gaming balls rolling on the guiding surface, the pair of projecting portions being the gaming balls along the guiding surface A game machine A1 characterized by being disposed at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction to be guided.

  Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a ball entry port in which game balls are formed so as to be capable of entering the ball, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game balls to the ball entry port and being displaceable. ing. Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members which have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entry port and are disposed with the ball entry port interposed therebetween and rotatably supported at the base end side. In this case, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-164598, a technique is provided in which a first groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface of one wing member and a second groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface of the other wing member. Disclosed. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the gaming ball simultaneously guides the guide surface of one wing member and the guide surface of the other wing member Even in the case of movement, the respective game balls can be biased in different directions (one on the glass plate side and the other on the game board side). Therefore, each of these gaming balls can smoothly enter the ball entrance. However, the above-described prior art has a problem that the gaming ball can not be biased sufficiently. In addition, the game ball entering from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and pass through from the other side of the guide member. In this case, since the game ball is not entered into the ball entrance, the player's There was a problem that interest was lost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the guide member is provided with a pair of projecting portions that are formed so as to be able to abut on the gaming balls that project from the guide surface and roll on the guide surface. Since the installation portions are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface, the game balls guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces abut the projecting portions By doing this, such gaming balls can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball entrance.

  In addition, the pair of projecting portions are disposed at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming ball is guided along the guiding surface, thereby projecting the gaming ball which has entered from one side of the guiding member. It can be made to abut on the part. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached from one side of the guide member passes through the guide member. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members disposed so as to sandwich the ball entry port and rotatably supported at the base end side, and the pair of wing members approaches or separates the tip end side By being rotated in the direction to be moved, a closed state in which the game ball can not pass or an open state in which the game ball can pass is formed, and the pair of projecting portions project from the respective guiding surfaces of the pair of wing members. A direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, the projecting portion of one wing member of the pair of wing members and the projecting portion of the other wing member being provided A game machine A2 characterized by being arranged at different positions.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members disposed with the ball entry port interposed therebetween and rotatably supported at the base end side. The installation portion projects from the guide surface of each of the pair of wing members, and the projection portion of one wing member of the pair of wing members and the projection portion of the other wing member are along the guide surface. Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided, the game balls can be made reliable by bringing the game balls guided (rolled) into contact with the projecting portions. Can be biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball entrance and to suppress ball clogging.

  In addition, the projecting portion of one wing member and the projecting portion of the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (direction from the tip side to the base end of the wing member) When the game ball entering the guide surface of one wing member reaches the guide surface of the other wing member by being arranged at different positions in the direction of movement, the game ball is placed on the other wing member. It can be made to abut on the projecting portion. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached to the guide surface in one wing member passes through the guide surface in the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine A2, the projecting portion is projected from the guiding surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the projecting portion projects from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member, and is thus guided by the guide surface It is possible to secure a rollable area before the game ball abuts on the projecting portion. Therefore, the fall of the rolling speed of a game ball can be suppressed by that part, and it can be made to enter a ball entrance smoothly.

  Further, the protruding portion is protruded from the protruding surface at a position closer to the base end side than the front end side of the wing member, whereby the path of the gaming ball biased against the protruding portion is the ball entrance. Before reaching the end of the guide surface, it is possible to suppress the return to the pre-biased path. That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the guide surface to the ball entry port while being biased.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, a first area that is continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing member is formed on the guide surface, and does not contact the gaming ball guided to the first area The projecting portion is formed in size, and the first region of the guide surface of one of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface of the other wing member are the same. A game machine A4 characterized by being arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in the gaming machine A2 or A3, a first area continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing member is formed on the guide surface, and the gaming area guided to the first area is not Since the projecting portion is formed in the size to be in contact, when the gaming ball entering the guide surface rolls on the first area, it is possible to avoid the reduction in the rolling speed of the gaming ball, You can enter the ball smoothly into the ball entrance.

  In this case, the first region of the guide surface of one of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface of the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. When the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) at the same time, the first region of the guide surface of one wing member and the first region of the guide surface of the other wing member are arranged at different positions. However, these gaming balls can be biased in different directions, and can smoothly enter the ball entrance.

  In any one of game machines A2 to A4, a base member rotatably supporting the wing member is provided, and the base member includes a restricting portion which abuts on the wing member to restrict the rotation of the wing member. A game machine A5 characterized in that the projecting portion of the wing member is in contact with the restriction portion of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4 includes a base member rotatably supporting the wing member, and the base member restricts the rotation of the wing member by contacting the wing member. Since the control part is provided and the projecting part of the wing member is in contact with the control part of the base member, breakage of the wing member can be suppressed. That is, since the protruding portion is a portion protruding from the wing member (guide surface), the portion where the rigidity of the wing member is increased relatively can be used as a stopper to abut the regulating portion of the base member. Therefore, damage to the wing members can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A5, the side face of the projecting portion is formed substantially flush with the side face of the base end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the side face is substantially flush with the side face of the base end side of the wing member. A game machine A6 characterized in that a side surface of the formed protruding portion is in contact with at least a restricting portion of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the projecting portion is formed such that the side surface thereof is substantially flush with the side surface of the base end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the base end side of the wing member Since the side surface of the projecting portion formed substantially flush with the side surface of the side member abuts at least the restricting portion of the base member, the portion (side surface of the projecting portion) far from the rotation axis is the restricting portion of the base member The reaction force input from the restricting portion to the wing member can be reduced by the amount that can be brought into contact with the blade. Therefore, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. In addition, for example, compared with the case where the protruding end surface of the protruding portion abuts on the restricting portion of the base member, the restricting portion of the base member can be separated from the ball entrance and the flow to the ball entrance We can secure space to become way. In addition to the side surface of the protruding portion, the side surface on the base end side of the wing member may also be in contact with the restricting portion of the base member. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced to further suppress breakage of the wing member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the pair of wing members are provided with an intervening wall positioned between the projecting portions facing each other in the closed state, and the projecting portions are not formed when viewed in the rotational axis direction. A game machine A7 characterized in that the facing space of the guide surface in the area to be made is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the facing space of the projecting portion is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  Here, the pair of wing members is disposed at a position where the facing distance of the guide surface in the closed state is a facing distance larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the projecting portion is protruded from the guide surface, the pair of wing members are further separated by an amount corresponding to the projecting height of the projecting portion so as not to hold the game ball between the projecting portions. The need arises and the space needed to arrange the pair of wing members increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with an intervening wall positioned between the projecting portions in the closed state, and the pair of wing members has a rotating shaft In the direction view, the facing distance of the guide surface in the region where the protruding portions are not formed is made larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the facing distance of the protruding portions is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, The space required for the arrangement of the pair of wing members can be reduced.

  That is, in the state where the gaming ball is guided (rolled) on the guide surface, even if the pair of wing members start closing (even if the transition to the closing state is started), the intervening wall By being positioned, it is possible to discharge the game balls from between the facing portions of the protruding portions and to prevent the game balls from being caught between the protruding portions. The game ball discharged from the facing portion of the projecting portion by the intervening wall is located between the facing of the guide surface in the region where the projecting portion is not formed, and the facing distance at this position is the gaming ball Because it is larger than the diameter of the game ball will not be pinched. As a result, the facing interval of the projecting portions can be made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thereby, the space required for arrangement | positioning of a pair of wing member can be restrained. In other words, the pair of wing members can be disposed in a space equivalent to the space necessary for the arrangement of the conventional product in which the projecting portion is not provided in the guide surface.

  In the gaming machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is located lower in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the guide surface and is located higher in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the ball entrance. A game machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is positioned lower in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the guide surface and higher in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the ball entrance Being positioned, the gaming ball guided to the guide surface can be thrown to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and can roll into the ball entrance by rolling the upper surface of the intervening wall.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one wing member of the pair of wing members is disposed at the position where the closed state is formed and the position where the other wing member forms the closed state A game machine A9 characterized in that the timing is different.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members is disposed at the position where the closed state is formed and the other wing member Since the timing at which the closed position is formed is different, it is difficult to hold the gaming ball between the pair of wing members (guide surfaces), and the distance between the pair of wing members can be narrowed accordingly. Therefore, the space required for disposition of the pair of wing members can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the guiding member is in a posture in which the guiding surface is made to face the ball inlet, and in a closing position in which the ball is not allowed to enter the ball inlet, and in a posture in which the guiding surface is an upper surface The guide surface is formed so as to be rotatable between an open position enabling entry of the gaming ball into the entry port of the game ball rolling on the front side of the entry port, the guide surface of the guide member being The width of the ball entrance is equal to or larger than the width of the ball entrance, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the ball entrance in a front view. A game machine A10, which is disposed at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface).

  In the gaming machine A1, the guiding member is in a posture in which the guiding member immerses below the ball entry opening to disable entering the ball in the ball entering hole, and the posture in which the guiding surface is an upper surface The guide surface of the guide member is formed so as to be slide-displaceable between an open position enabling entry of the gaming ball into the ball entry port of the game ball rolling on the front surface side of the ball port and rolling the guide surface. The width of the ball entry hole is equal to or greater than the width of the ball entry hole, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the ball entry hole in front view. The game machine A11, wherein the game machine A11 is arranged in a different direction in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface).

  According to the gaming machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the guiding member of the guiding member has a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entrance. The pair of projecting portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the ball entrance in a front view, and are positioned in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guiding surface) The game balls can be reliably biased by bringing the game balls guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces into contact with the projecting portions because they are arranged differently. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball entrance.

  In addition, one projecting portion and the other projecting portion are disposed at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). When the game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with any one of the pair of projecting portions. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball entering from the one side (or the other side) in the width direction to the guide surface of the guide member passing through the guide surface of the guide member and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the guide surface. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance to improve the interest of the player.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
A ball entry port in which game balls are formed so as to be able to enter the ball, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry port, and a drive means for applying driving force to the pair of wing members When the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the driving means, the gaming ball is disposed at a permissible position that allows the ball to enter the ball entrance and the driving force of the driving means causes the pair of In the gaming machine, further comprising: restricting means disposed at a restricting position for restricting game ball entry into the ball entry opening when the wing member is closed, the pair of wing members being closed or the pair being closed The gaming machine B1 characterized in that the regulation means is formed so as to be maintainable at the regulation position in a state where the wing member is opened from the outside.

  Here, the ball entry port where the game ball is formed so as to be capable of entering the ball, the pair of wing members disposed with the ball entry port interposed therebetween, and the pair of wing members apply a driving force to open or close The driving means and the driving force of the driving means are disposed at the allowable position for allowing the game ball to enter the ball entry opening when the pair of wing members is opened and the pair of feathers by the driving force of the driving means There is known a gaming machine provided with a restricting means disposed at a restricting position for restricting the entrance of the game ball to the ball entrance when the member is closed (for example, JP-A-2011-172833).

  According to this gaming machine, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the driving means, the restriction means is disposed at the allowable position, whereby the gaming ball having passed between the pair of wing members is inserted into the ball opening You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is disposed at the restricting position, so that the game ball moves to the entrance when the pair of wing members is forcibly released from the outside. It can be regulated that the ball is thrown.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, for example, after forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricted position to the allowable position. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of restricting the game ball from being illegally entered to the ball entrance is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the arrangement of the restricting means can be maintained at the restricting position in the state in which the pair of wing members is closed or the pair of wing members is opened from the outside. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it can be easy to control that a game ball is illegally entered into a ball entrance.

  In addition, the control position which restricts the ball entry of the game ball to the ball entrance is the meaning sufficient if the game ball can be stopped at the predetermined position. That is, in the case where the ball entry port and the passage through which the game ball flowed from the ball entry port continues through the ball entry port, the restricted position by the restricting means (position for stopping the game ball) is greater than the ball entry port. It may be upstream, or may be downstream of the ball entrance (i.e., in the middle of a path flowing in from the ball entrance and passing through the passage). In the latter case, the restriction position by the restriction means may be upstream of the detection means with respect to the detection means (detection sensor) disposed in the middle of the passage to detect passage of the gaming ball, and the detection means It may be downstream.

  The gaming machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism is slide-displaced between the open slide position and the closed slide position by the drive force of the drive means. The slide transmission member and the slide displacement to the open slide position of the slide transmission member are rotated to the open rotational position to open the pair of wing members and close by the slide displacement to the closed slide position of the slide transmission member And a rotation transmission member which is rotated to a rotational position to close the pair of wing members, the restriction means is disposed on the slide transmission member, and the restriction is provided when the slide transmission member is slid to an open slide position. Means are arranged in the permitted position and the slide transmission member is slid into the closed slide position The rotation transmitting member and the slide transmitting member are disposed when the rotation transmitting member is disposed at the open rotational position in a state where the restricting means is disposed at the restricting position and the slide transmitting member is disposed at the closed sliding position. By engaging, the slide displacement to the open slide position of the slide transmission member is regulated game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, when the rotation transmitting member is disposed at the open rotational position with the slide transmitting member disposed at the closing sliding position, the rotation transmitting member and the slide transmitting member As a result, since the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is restricted, it is possible to easily restrict the game ball from being illegally inserted into the ball entrance.

  That is, when the pair of wing members being closed is forcibly released from the outside, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position with the slide transmission member disposed in the closed slide position. In such a state, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged, so that the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is restricted, so that the restriction means can be maintained at the restriction position (the restriction means allows Improper displacement from the outside to the position can be suppressed). As a result, after forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside, even if the game ball is allowed to pass from between the pair of wing members, the restriction means restricts such game balls from entering the ball entry port. it can.

  In the gaming machine B2, a slide groove is extended to one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transfer member and a slide projection is projected from the other, and the slide projection is slid along the slide groove. Thus, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted to rotate the rotation transmission member, and the slide projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the slide groove to open the slide transmission member. A game machine B3 characterized in that slide displacement to the slide position is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the sliding groove is extended to one of the sliding transmission member and the rotation transmitting member, the sliding projection is projected from the other, and the sliding projection is slid. The sliding displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted by being slid along the moving groove, the rotation transmitting member is rotated, and the sliding projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, whereby the slide transmission is performed. Since the slide displacement to the open slide position of the member is restricted, it is difficult to release the restriction while achieving downsizing.

  That is, by using the sliding groove and the sliding projection for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the rotation transmission member for rotation, it is possible to form means for restricting the slide displacement to the open slide position of the slide transmission member. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another place, the size can be reduced accordingly. In addition, the structure in which the sliding projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove makes it difficult to make unauthorized access to the engaging portion from the outside, and the restriction (engagement) is released by that amount. It can be difficult.

  The gaming machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism is slide-displaced between the open slide position and the closed slide position by the drive force of the drive means. The slide transmission member and the slide displacement to the open slide position of the slide transmission member are rotated to the open rotational position to open the pair of wing members and close by the slide displacement to the closed slide position of the slide transmission member A rotation transmitting member which is rotated to a rotational position to at least close the pair of wing members, wherein the restriction means is disposed on the rotation transmitting member, and the rotation transmitting member is rotated to an open rotational position The restricting means is disposed at the restricting position when the restricting means is disposed at the permitting position, and the rotation transmitting member is rotated to the closed rotational position. In the state where the slide transmission member is disposed in the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is disposed in the closed rotational position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other. A game machine B4 characterized in that rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, in the state where the slide transmission member is disposed at the closing slide position and the rotation transmission member is disposed at the closing rotational position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member By being engaged, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted, so it is possible to easily restrict the game ball from being illegally inserted into the ball entrance.

  That is, from the state in which the pair of wing members is closed, for example, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open position by forcibly opening the pair of wing members improperly from the outside or directly operating the rotation transmission member. Even if it is attempted, the rotation transmitting member and the slide transmitting member are engaged with each other, so that the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotational position is restricted, so that the restricting means can be maintained at the restricting position (ie, restricting means Can be suppressed from being forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, unauthorized entry of the game ball into the ball entrance can be restricted by the control means.

  In the gaming machine B4, a protrusion protruding from one of the slide transfer member or the rotation transfer member, and an engagement portion formed on the other of the slide transfer member or the rotation transfer member so as to be engageable with the protrusion. A game machine B5, characterized in that the projection is projected along the direction of slide displacement of the slide transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4, the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member is capable of engaging with the projection projecting from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member. And the protrusion is projected along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide transmission member, and the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is used to engage the protrusion and the engagement portion in the engagement portion. And the disengagement of the engagement can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

  The engaging portion may be a surface (a slide transmission member or the other outer surface of the rotation transmission member) to which the projection can abut, and a hole or a recess (slide transmission member or rotation transmission) into which the projection can be inserted. It may be a hole drilled in one of the members or a concave portion). That is, it is only required that the rotation of the rotation transmission member can be regulated to the open rotational position by the projection coming into contact with the engaging portion. In this case, the engaging portion is preferably a hole or a recess. Since the projection part is inserted into the engagement part, the space necessary for the disposition of the projection part can be reduced, and miniaturization can be achieved, and the projection part is externally inserted by being inserted into the engagement part. It is because it can be shielded from the outside and illegal access to such a projection can be made difficult.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the closing rotation position, and an opening side contact portion which abuts and opens the pair of wing members when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the opening rotation position. A game machine B6 comprising: a closing side contact portion which is brought into contact with the pair of wing members to close them.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmitting member is brought into contact with the pair of wing members to be opened when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the opening rotation position. (C) Since it is provided with the closing side contact part which contacts and closes the pair of wing members when it is rotated toward the closing rotational position, it is possible to suppress the forced open of the pair of wing members from the outside. External unauthorized access to the rotation transmitting member or the slide transmitting member can be made difficult.

  That is, when the wing member is displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion of the rotation transmission member is pressed by the wing member, and the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the open rotation position. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotation transmission member can be restricted by the engagement of the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member, so that the displacement of the wing member is brought into contact with the rotation transmission member on the closing side. It can be regulated by department. That is, displacement of the wing member from the outside in the direction of forced opening can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members from being forcibly released from the outside illegally, and to make unauthorized access from the outside to the rotation transmitting member or the slide transmitting member difficult.

  The gaming machine B4 or B5 includes biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmission member abuts against the pair of wing members when being rotated toward the open rotational position. Game machine characterized in that it comprises an open side contact portion to be opened and the pair of wing members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the closing rotational position B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4 or B5, the gaming machine B7 includes biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the open rotation position , And the pair of wing members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the closed rotational position. When the pair of wing members is improperly released from the outside, the pair of wing members is not in contact with the rotation transmission member, and it is possible to avoid the external force due to the forced opening being applied to the rotation transmission member. As a result, breakage of the pair of wing members, the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member can be suppressed.

  As the biasing means, a spring (a torsion spring or a coil spring) which biases the pair of wing members in the closing direction by elastic recovery force, a magnet which biases the pair of wing members in the closing direction by adsorption force, etc. Be done.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B7, the game machine further comprises a detection means for detecting the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the restriction means makes the restriction position downstream of the detection means, and A game machine B8 characterized in that the game ball is restricted at a position where detection by the detection means is possible.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the gaming machine includes detection means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance, and the regulating means has a regulated position downstream of the detecting means. At the same time, since the game ball is regulated at a position where detection by the detection means is possible, the detection means detects the game ball when, for example, the wing member is forcibly opened and the game ball is illegally introduced from the ball entry port. Can continue to be Therefore, it can be detected that the game ball has flowed in illegally by determining whether the detection by the detection means has continued beyond the predetermined time.

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking the decorative symbol display device 800 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a first reel formed rotatably and a second reel disposed substantially concentrically and rotatably formed inside the first reel, the first reel has a cylindrical shape. And a first side wall projecting radially inward from one axial direction side of the first outer peripheral wall, wherein the second reel is formed cylindrical and has an outer surface A second outer peripheral wall facing the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined interval, and radially inward projecting from one axial direction side of the second outer peripheral wall, and an outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall is an inner surface of the first side wall And a second side wall facing each other at a predetermined distance, and a standing portion is provided to be directed from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall or the outer surface of the second side wall to the other Machine C1.

  Here, a first reel formed rotatably and a second reel disposed substantially concentrically and rotatably formed on the inner side of the first reel (ie, having a double reel structure) Gaming machines are known (e.g., JP 2003-230693 A). Also known is a technique for removing and cleaning dust adhering to the display surface of the reel by bringing the rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2009-28241).

  However, the double reel structure has a problem that cleaning is difficult. That is, in the double reel structure, since the space for arranging the rotating brush described above can not be secured between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel), the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel And the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) can not be cleaned.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel has a first outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape, and a first side wall projecting radially inward from one axial direction side of the first outer peripheral wall. The second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape and the outer surface of the second reel is opposed to the inner surface of the first outer wall at a predetermined distance, and the diameter from one side of the second outer wall in the axial direction A second side wall projecting inward in the direction and having an outer surface facing the inner surface of the first side wall at a predetermined distance, and standing from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall or the outer surface of the second side wall to the other Since the installation portion is erected, the erected portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall to generate a wind pressure, and the wind pressure is used to generate the first Air can flow between the inner surface of the outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. Thus, dust can be removed by the flow of air, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be cleaned. That is, in the double reel structure, cleaning can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine C2 characterized in that the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape in an axial direction view and have a surface continuous in a circumferential direction.

  Here, when an opening is formed in at least one of the first side wall or the second side wall, or when a part in the circumferential direction is partially divided, the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall Since the wind pressure generated by displacement of the standing portion in the circumferential direction escapes from the opening portion or the dividing portion, the wind pressure weakens, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall It becomes difficult for the air between them to flow.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed to have an annular shape in the axial direction view and have a continuous surface in the circumferential direction. The wind pressure generated by circumferentially displacing the standing portion between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be increased. Accordingly, air can be easily made to flow between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. As a result, the wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is utilized to form the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the second outer peripheral wall. It can make it easy to make the air between the outer surface flow.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first reel is provided with a first support wall rotatably supported at the center and supporting the first side wall, and the second reel is rotatably supported at the center. A game machine C3 comprising: a second support wall supported and supporting the second side wall, wherein an opening is formed in at least one of the first support wall or the second support wall.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the opening is formed in at least one of the supporting wall supporting the first side wall or the second supporting wall supporting the second side wall, The air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is exhausted to the outside through the opening, or air is externally applied between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall It can be inhaled. That is, the flow resistance of air can be reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be easily made to flow (outflow or inflow) accordingly. As a result, the wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is utilized to form the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the second outer peripheral wall. It can make it easy to make the air between the outer surface flow.

  In the gaming machine C3, when the erected portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the other of the first reel or the second reel A game machine C4 characterized in that at least the opening is formed in the first support wall or the second support wall.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, when the erected portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the first reel or Since the opening is formed at least in the other first support wall or the second support wall of the second reel, it is possible to easily exert the effect of reducing the flow resistance by exhausting or sucking in air through the opening. . That is, when one of the first and second reels on which the erected portion is erected is rotated, the other of the openings having the opening formed therein is stopped to prevent air from passing through the opening. The resistance of the flow (exhaust or intake) can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a gaming machine characterized in that the standing portion is erected at different positions in the radial direction on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. C5.

  In the gaming machine C5, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the standing portion is provided so as to be radially different from each other on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Alternatively, regardless of which of the second reels is rotated, the standing portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall to generate wind pressure. Therefore, in the effect by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to be light transmissive, and a plurality of symbols are formed on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. A gaming machine C6 arranged along a circumferential direction, and the standing portion is provided upright on a second side wall of the second reel.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer circumferential wall of the first reel is formed to have light transparency, and the second outer circumferential wall of the second reel Since a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the second reel through the first reel. In this case, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel whose number of rotations is larger than that of the first reel. In the effect by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be increased.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
The light emitting device comprises: a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted; and a transmitting member for transmitting light emitted from the light emitting means, wherein the transmitting member is curved and formed. In a gaming machine arranged along a curve, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  Here, it comprises a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and a transmitting member for transmitting light emitted from the light emitting means, and the transmitting member is formed to be curved, and the plurality of light emitting means are curved of the transmitting member The game machine arranged along with is known (for example, JP, 2013-106672, A). In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals in a front view of the transmission member. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (chord) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the interval between adjacent light emitting means is narrowed at a part of the plurality of light emitting means, so that there is a problem that the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means is biased. Therefore, heat is concentrated on a part of the light emitting means, which tends to reduce the life.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the intervals between adjacent light emitting means can be made constant in each light emitting means, and the heat distribution emitted by the light emitting means Can be equalized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the concentration of heat on some of the light emitting means, and to improve the life of each light emitting means.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a reflecting member for reflecting light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of division screens corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the section widths of the plurality of section screens in the front view of the transmissive members are set to be substantially the same.

  Here, when the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals (that is, circumferentially equal intervals) along the curve of the transmission member, the plurality of light emission units are arranged at unequal intervals in the front view of the transmission member. The Rukoto. That is, in the front view of the transmitting member, a region where the distance between the light emitting means is narrow and a region where the distance between the light emitting units is narrow are formed. Therefore, the distribution of light quantity becomes uneven along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, a reflecting member for reflecting light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member is provided, and the reflecting member corresponds to a plurality of light emitting means Since the division widths in front view of the transmission members of the plurality of division screens are set to be substantially the same, the light amount of each division screen visually recognized in the front view of the transmission members is substantially It can be the same. As a result, the distribution of light quantity along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

  A gaming machine D3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D2, a light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, so for example, compared to the case where the light emitting surface is circular Since the diffusibility can be secured (light can be emitted at a wider angle), the distribution of light quantity can be made uniform on one section screen.

  In addition, a light emission surface means the front of the sealing resin which encloses a LED chip. Therefore, the light emitting surface having a rectangular shape in front view means that the front shape of the sealing resin (the front shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the sealing resin) is rectangular.

  In the gaming machine D3, at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is disposed in a direction in which one side of the light emitting surface is along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means are disposed in a direction in which one side of the light emitting surface follows the tangential direction in the curved shape of the transmitting member. The light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily diffused uniformly along the curvature of the transmitting member. As a result, it is possible to make uniform the distribution of the amount of light which is transmitted through the transmission member and visually recognized.

  In any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the division screen is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transmission member and is recessed on the side away from the back surface of the transmission member, and the light emission surface of the light emitting means is the transmission A game machine D5 characterized in that a facing space between a member and the ward screen is faced.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the division screen is formed as a curved surface facing the back surface of the transmission member and recessed on the side away from the back surface of the transmission member. Since it faces between the transparent member and the division screen, the substrate can be disposed in a posture perpendicular to the transparent member. That is, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the unit including the transmitting member, the substrate and the reflecting member can be increased. In this case, since the division screen is disposed in a manner of surrounding the periphery of the light emitted from the light emission surface of the light emission means from the direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected by the division screen is transmitted It can be made to inject uniformly. As a result, it is possible to make uniform the distribution of the amount of light which is transmitted through the transmission member and visually recognized.

  In the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member is provided with a connecting surface continuously connected to the division screen and facing the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the connecting surface is projected toward the light emitting surface of the light emitting means A gaming machine D6 characterized in that it is formed as a curved surface to be.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member is provided with a connecting surface continuously connected to the ward screen and facing the light emitting surface of the light emitting unit, and the connecting surface is the light emitting unit Since it is formed as a curved surface which becomes convex toward the light emission surface of the light source, it is possible to make the light reflected by the connection surface uniformly incident on the back surface of the transmission member. As a result, it is possible to make uniform the distribution of the amount of light which is transmitted through the transmission member and visually recognized.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A rotating drum which is rotatably formed and a plurality of which are juxtaposed at predetermined intervals; and a decorative member disposed along the space between the plurality of rotating cylinders and at least a part of which is light transmissive A substrate disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, the substrate being disposed in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back of the decorative member A gaming machine provided with a reflecting member for reflecting light emitted from the light emitting means to a back surface of the decorative member.

  Here, a plurality of rotary cylinders formed rotatably and juxtaposed at predetermined intervals, and disposed along a space between the plurality of rotary cylinders and at least a part of which has optical transparency. The substrate is provided in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. The game machine provided is known (for example, JP, 2013-5927, A). According to this gaming machine, not only the space between the rotating bodies can be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern is formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light of the light emitting means transmitted through the decorative member, It is possible to produce an effect of making the player visually recognize the design of the decorative member integrally with the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the substrate is disposed in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficient for the back surface of the decorative member It is impossible to illuminate the pattern formed by the light of the light emitting means, and the design can not be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there is a problem that the rendering effect is insufficient. On the other hand, while the design formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means is small, if the decoration member (area except the design) is enlarged, the sense of unity between the decoration member and the rotating drum is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decoration member is provided, the posture on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decoration member Even when the substrate is provided, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member can be broadened. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emission means can be enlarged by that amount, and the effect of presentation can be enhanced. Moreover, since the area | region except a pattern can be made small by the part which can enlarge the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of a light emission means, sense of unity with a decoration member and a revolving drum can be formed.

  In the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum, and in front view, is formed by extending the outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum. A game machine E2 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side relative to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum and extends the outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum in front view Since it is formed to be extended, the axial end face of the rotating drum can be easily shielded (not easily visible) from the player. In addition, since the design of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means can be brought closer to the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum, one of the decorative member and the rotating drum It can facilitate the formation of a bodily sensation.

  In the gaming machine E2, the reflective member connects the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted to the back surface of the decorative member, so that the region on the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the symbol on the decorative member A game machine E3 which surrounds the area to be formed and is inclined in a direction away from the axial direction end face of the rotating drum as it goes from the decorative member to the base plate.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted to the back surface of the decorative member, so that the area on which the light emitting device is mounted And the area of the decorative member in which the design is formed, and the back surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end face of the rotary drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate, the light emitted from the light emitting means To make the back of the decorative member close to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum while ensuring the size of the pattern formed (displayed), and inserting the rotating drum into the back side of the back of the decorative member Proximity). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (not easily visible), and the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be easily formed.

  A gaming machine E4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E2 or E3, the light emitting means is mounted on both the surface on one side of the substrate and the surface on the other side.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, since the light emitting means is mounted on both sides of the one side and the other side of the substrate, the light emission mounted on the one side Different designs can be formed (displayed) independently on the decorative member depending on the light emitted from the means and the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the surface on the other side.

  In this case, the number of substrates disposed between the juxtaposed rotating drums can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arrangement | positioning of a board | substrate can be restrained, the part can make the rotating cylinder enter the back side of the back surface of a decoration member (put a rotating cylinder close to a board | substrate). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (not easily visible), and the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be easily formed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A game machine having a first displacement member and a second displacement member, which are formed so as to be displaceable in opposite directions and approach or separate from each other and are displaceable in the same direction with opposing sides abutting each other A base member, and a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism for displaceably supporting the first displacement member and the second displacement member on the base member, wherein the support mode of the first support mechanism is the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism. The second displacement that is biased to one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member and is opposite to the other side of the opposite side of the second displacement member that is in contact with the one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member A game machine F1 characterized in that the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposite side of the member.

  Here, it is provided with a first displacement member and a second displacement member which are formed so as to be displaceable in opposite directions and approach or separate from each other and are displaceable in the same direction with opposing sides in contact with each other. Game machines are known (for example, JP 2013-106844 A). According to this gaming machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to the position where the opposite sides abut, an object (for example, the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member) And shielding the liquid crystal display device and the rendering member, and displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the direction away from each other, so that the shielding is released along with the displacement and the object can be viewed. Can be performed. Further, while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) to maintain shielding of the object. Alternatively, an effect before releasing the shielding (an effect for focusing on the releasing operation of the shielding) can be performed.

  However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is difficult to bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of component members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed in the When a gap is formed between the opposite sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the effect of presentation is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member and the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism for respectively movably supporting the first displacement member and the second displacement member on the base member are provided. The support mode of the mechanism is biased to one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member, and is opposite to the other side of the opposite side of the second displacement member that is in contact with one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member. Since the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposing side of the second displacement member, in the state in which the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, The support mode and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be biased to the opposite side (a side rotated 180 ° around the center of one side and the other side of the opposite side). Thereby, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  Here, as an aspect in which the support state is biased to one side, for example, those having different rigidity (the size, the number of components, the number of materials, etc. of the constituent members) of the component on one side and the other side, one side and the other The driving force (for example, size, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) transmitted on the different side is different, the connection state between the components on one side and the other side (for example, the number of connected parts, Those with different amount of stagnation etc., and those with different ease of displacement to the other on one side and the other side (biasing force received from biasing means, gravity, resistance in sliding or rotation etc) , And combinations thereof are exemplified.

  Therefore, in the case where the support state is biased to one side by the rigidity of the component members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism have their high rigidity side (low side) as the low rigidity side (high side) of the other. You can head to). Therefore, in a state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (advances) the other on the high rigidity side. On the side with low rigidity, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retracting) the other. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first drive means for generating a driving force, a pair of first connecting members connecting the first displacement member to the base member, and a pair of first connecting members. A first transmission member and a first other transmission member configured to respectively transmit the driving force of the first driving means and have different configurations, and the second support mechanism generates a driving force; (2) driving means, a pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and transmission of the driving force of the second driving means to the pair of second connecting members A game machine F2 comprising: a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving unit that generates a driving force, and a pair of first connecting members that connect the first displacement member to the base member. And a first support member and a first other transfer member configured to transmit the driving force of the first drive means to the pair of first connection members and have different configurations from each other, and the second support mechanism includes: The driving force of the second driving means is transmitted to the second driving means for generating the driving force, the pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and the pair of second connecting members. Since the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission member having different configurations are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily adhered to each other, and a gap is formed between the opposing sides. It can be suppressed to be formed.

  That is, in a state in which the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism each have, for example, a large drive force transmission timing or a drive force transmission timing While the other side is pushed (advanced) on the front side, it is possible to form a state in which the smaller side of the driving force and the transmission timing of the driving force receive the other side (backward). As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  Here, as an embodiment in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) are different from each other, for example, Those with different dimensions, number of members, materials, etc., different connected states of components (for example, the number of connected parts, the amount of rattling of connected parts, etc.), combinations of these, etc. Be done. That is, due to the difference between these configurations, the magnitude and transmission timing of the driving force to be transmitted will be different, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are respectively biased to one side.

  In the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member and the other end is the base member. A game machine F3 rotatably supported on the same axis.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end is the first displacement member or the second displacement. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with the opposite sides thereof in contact with each other since the other end side is coaxially rotatably supported on the base member while being connected to the member. In this case, even when the bias of the support mode is used, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposite sides are in contact with each other.

  In the gaming machine F3, an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material is disposed on at least one of the first connection member and the second connection member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member face each other. In a state in which the elastic body is in an elastically compressed state between the first connection member and the second connection member.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F3, an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material is disposed on at least one of the first connecting member or the second connecting member. Since the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state in a state where the opposite sides are in contact with each other, the first moving member and When making the second displacement member reciprocate in the same direction while bringing the opposite sides into contact with each other, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposite sides are in contact with each other even when utilizing the bias of the support mode.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by a first drive means for generating a drive force and the first drive means and connects the first displacement member to the base member. A pair of first connection members and a first one-side biasing member and a first other-side biasing member for applying different biasing forces to the pair of first connection members, the second support mechanism being driven The second drive means for generating a force, the pair of second connection members driven by the second drive means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and the pair of second connection members differ from each other A game machine F5 comprising a second one-side biasing member and a second other-side biasing member for applying a biasing force.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first drive means for generating a driving force and driven by the first drive means. A pair of first connecting members for connecting the displacing member to the base member, and a first one-side biasing member and a first other-side biasing member for applying different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, The second support mechanism includes a second drive means for generating a driving force, a pair of second connection members driven by the second drive means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and a pair of the second connection members. (2) Since the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the connecting member are provided, it is possible to easily make the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member in close contact with each other A gap is formed between the opposite sides Rukoto can be suppressed.

  That is, in a state in which the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes in the other (advances) In addition, on the side where the biasing force is small, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retracting) the other party. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  The first one-side biasing member and the first other-side biasing member may have the same configuration. That is, the biasing forces applied to the pair of first connecting members may be different from each other by the positions at which the biasing forces are applied being different from one another or the elastic deformation amounts being different from one another. The same applies to the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by a first drive means for generating a drive force and the first drive means and connects the first displacement member to the base member. A pair of first connecting members, and a first biasing member for applying a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members, wherein the second support mechanism is a second driving means for generating a driving force And a second connecting member driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and a biasing force applied to one of the pair of second connecting members. A game machine F6 comprising: 2 biasing members.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means generating driving force and the first driving means and the first supporting mechanism. The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members for connecting the displacing member to the base member, and a first biasing member for applying a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. A second drive means for generating the second displacement means, a pair of second connection members driven by the second drive means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and attached to one of the pair of second connection members Since the second biasing member for applying the force is provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily adhered to each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  That is, in a state in which the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes the other on the side where the biasing force is applied, for example ( At the same time as advancing), on the side where the biasing force is not acted, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retracting) the other party. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, one leg is connected to the first connection member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacement member approaches the second displacement member. And a first torsion spring for applying a biasing force in a direction to move the first displacement member in a direction in which the first displacement member is moved closer to the second displacement member. A game machine F7 characterized in that at least one of the connection position of the first leg and the first connection member or the connection position of the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine F3 or F4, one leg is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member And the first connecting member is rotated when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction approaching the second displacement member. The driving force of the first driving means necessary to cause the movement can be assisted by the biasing force of the first torsion spring. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member is displaced from the stopped state from the retracted position away from the second displacement member to the abutting position in contact with the second displacement member, the displacement can be smoothly started. it can.

  In this case, as the first connection member is rotated in the direction to move the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member, the connection position between one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connection member or the first torsion spring Since at least one of the connection positions of the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the first displacement member is brought closer to the second displacement member as the distance from the winding portion to the acting position of the force becomes longer. It is possible to weaken the biasing force in the direction of Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member brought close to the second displacement member is stopped, the displacement can be reliably stopped, so that damage due to a collision can be suppressed. In addition, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocation displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocation displacement can be reduced. The effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F7, a direction in which one leg is connected to the second connection member and the other leg is connected to the base member so as to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member. The second torsion spring includes a second torsion spring for applying a biasing force to one of the legs of the second torsion spring as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member. A game machine F8 characterized in that at least one of the connection position between the second connection member and the second connection member or the connection position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

  According to the gaming machine F8, the second torsion spring exerts the same effect as the first torsion spring in the gaming machine F7. In particular, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction in a state where the opposite sides are in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed in both of them. Become. Further, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are at the same height (arranged at the gravity direction position), the contact position of both is the highest position (or lowest position) in the gravity direction, and the two are separated. The configuration of the gaming machine F8 is particularly effective when the position to be retracted (the retracted position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the direction of gravity.

  In the game machine F7, a game machine F9 characterized in that the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, since the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member by displacement upward in the gravity direction, the first displacement member is directed downward in the gravity direction The biasing force in the direction to displace the first displacement member upward in the direction of gravity can be increased as it is positioned (ie, the first displacement member is displaced in the direction of gravity upward as the first displacement member is positioned above in the direction of gravity). Can weaken the

  Therefore, when the first displacement member is displaced (lifted) from the stopped state toward the upper side in the direction of gravity, the displacement (lift) can be smoothly started and the lifted first displacement member is stopped. In this case, the displacement can be stopped not only by the action of gravity but also by the weakening of the biasing force. As a result, damage due to a collision with the second displacement member can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the first displacement member displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is enhanced, and the biasing force is opposed to the action of gravity which is intended to continue the lowering. be able to. As a result, the first displacement member can be reliably stopped.

  In the gaming machine F9, a direction in which one leg is connected to the second connection member and the other leg is connected to the base member as a torsion spring and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member The second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, and the second displacement member is the first displacement member. As the second connection member is rotated in the direction to move closer to the connection direction, the connection position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connection member or the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member A game machine F10 characterized in that at least one of the connection positions of is separated from the winding portion.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine F9, one leg is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member. 1) The second displacement member is provided with a second torsion spring for applying a biasing force in a direction away from the displacement member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity; Required to rotate the first connection member when it is necessary to displace the second displacement member against the direction of gravity when it is necessary to displace the second displacement member away from the first displacement member. The driving force of the driving means can be assisted by the biasing force of the second torsion spring. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

  In this case, as the second connection member is rotated in the direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member, the connection position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connection member or the second torsion spring Since at least one of the connection positions of the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by an increase in the distance from the winding portion to the acting position of the force. It is possible to weaken the biasing force in the direction (direction of raising the gravity direction). Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocation can be suppressed. The displacement speed can be increased, and the rendering effect can be improved.

  A gaming machine K1 characterized in that in any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4 and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among other things, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “A variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided to operate the start operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

A gaming machine K2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4 and F1 to F10. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.
In any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4 and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine Feature game machine K3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball entry port in which game balls are formed so as to be capable of entering a ball, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry port, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members And a driving means for opening or closing the driving means, and a driving means for driving the driving means while being disposed at an allowable position for allowing the game ball to enter the ball entrance when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the driving means. There is known a gaming machine provided with a regulation means disposed at a regulation position which regulates entry of the game ball into the entrance when the pair of wing members is closed by force (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2011-172833 A)).
However, in the gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the effect of restricting the game ball from being illegally inserted into the ball entrance is insufficient.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can easily restrict the game ball from being illegally inserted into the ball entrance. Do.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 includes a ball entry port in which game balls are formed so as to be capable of entering a ball, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry port, and Driving means for applying a driving force to a pair of wing members to open or close and allowing the game ball to enter the ball entrance when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the driving means The control means is provided at a permitted position, and is provided with a restricting means for restricting the ball entry of the gaming ball into the ball entry opening when the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the drive means. In the state in which the pair of wing members is closed or in the state where the pair of wing members is opened from the outside, the restricting means is formed so as to be maintainable in the restricting position.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, further comprising: a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism driving the driving means The slide transmission member is slidably displaced between the open slide position and the closed slide position by force and the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is rotated to the open rotational position to open the pair of wing members And a rotation transmission member which is rotated to the closed rotational position by the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the closed slide position to close the pair of wing members, the restriction means is disposed on the slide transmission member, When the slide transmission member is slide-displaced to the open slide position, the restricting means is disposed at the allowable position, and the slide transmission portion When the rotation transmitting member is disposed in the open rotational position, the regulating means is disposed in the regulated position when the sliding component is slid to the closed sliding position, and the slide transmitting member is disposed in the closed sliding position. By the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member being engaged, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is restricted.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein a sliding groove is extended to one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member and a sliding projection is projected from the other, The sliding protrusion is slid along the sliding groove to transmit the sliding displacement of the sliding transmission member to rotate the rotation transmitting member, and the sliding is performed on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove. By the projection being engaged, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is restricted.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to easily restrict that the gaming ball is illegally inserted into the ball entrance.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to easily restrict the game ball from being illegally inserted into the ball entrance.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, it is possible to make it difficult to release the regulation while achieving downsizing.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board
100-104 substrate box 140 second winning opening ( ball entrance)
15065 Variable winning device (guide member)
15065a side surface (guide surface)
15065b bulging part (protruding part)
15065c bulging part (protruding part)
65a specific winning hole 510 base member 511b2 engaging portion (regulating portion)
511b1 standing part (intervening wall)
520 1st Motorized Part (Guide Member)
520L wing member 520R wing member 524L bulging part (protruding part)
524R bulging part (protruding part)
526L side (guide surface)
526R side (guide surface)
530, 8530, 9530, 17530 drive unit (drive means)
531 solenoid (drive means)
532 Second projection (regulating means)
532, 8532 Sliding member (slide transmission member)
532d Engaging groove (sliding groove)
8532e third projection (protrusion)
533, 5353, 8533, 9533 Rotating member (rotational transmission member)
533a Coupling part (engagement part)
533b Projection (Sliding projection)
8533e Second projection (regulating means)
621 Light transmission member (transmission member, decoration member)
624 Base member (base)
624a LED (light emitting means)
625 Reflecting member 625a1 Reflecting surface (connected surface)
625b recessed part (ward screen)
660 Base member 672U displacement member (first displacement member)
672D displacement member (second displacement member)
680U drive means (first support mechanism)
680D drive means (second support mechanism)
684U 1st link member (1st one side transmission member)
684D 1st link member (2nd one side transmission member)
686U second link member (first other side transmission member)
686U Second link member (second other side transmission member)
800 Decorative Symbol Display (Rotation)
810 Inner reel unit (second reel)
811 Inner reel (second outer peripheral wall)
812 Hub (second side wall)
812a1 protrusion (standing part)
812c Spoke (second support wall)
812c1 inner opening (opening)
5813a protrusion (standing part)
820 Outer reel unit (1st reel)
821 Outer reel (first outer peripheral wall)
822 spokes (first support wall)
824 edge (first side wall)
3824a protrusion (standing part)
825 Outer opening (opening)
SP1 Torsion spring (biasing member, first torsion spring)
SP2 Torsion spring (biasing member, second torsion spring)

Claims (3)

A ball entrance opening game ball is formed to be ball entrance, a pair of wing members which are disposed to sandwich the inlet ball port, and drive means to grant driving force to their pair of blade members, the driving disposed in a first position for allowing the ball entrance of game ball into the entering ball neck when the pair of wing members by the driving force of the means is released, the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of said driving means The gaming machine further comprising: restricting means disposed at a second position for restricting the entry of the gaming ball to the entrance when the
A transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members;
The transmission mechanism includes a slide transmission member which is slide-displaced between a first slide position and a second slide position by a driving force of the driving means, and a slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the first slide position. A rotation transmission member which is rotated to one rotation position to open the pair of wing members, and is rotated to a second rotation position by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the second slide position to close the pair of wing members Equipped with
The restricting means is disposed on the slide transmission member;
When the rotation transmission member is rotated to the first rotation position in a state in which the slide transmission member is disposed at the second slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged. , The slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the first slide position is restricted,
The regulating means is capable formed maintained at the second position before Symbol Te state odor driving force is released the pair of blade members are opened without being granted the pair of wing members closed state or the driving means Game machine characterized by A ball entry port in which game balls are formed so as to be able to enter the ball, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry port, a drive means for applying a driving force to the pair of wing members, and its drive means When the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the first and second wing members, the pair of wing members is disposed at the first position that allows the game ball to enter the ball entry port. And a restriction means disposed at a second position for restricting the entry of the game ball into the entrance,
A transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members;
The transmission mechanism includes a slide transmission member which is slide-displaced between a first slide position and a second slide position by a driving force of the driving means, and a slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the first slide position . 1 is rotated to a rotational position to open the pair of blade members, the rotation transmitting member for closing the pair of wing members by the sliding displacement is rotated to a second rotational position of the to the second slide position of the slide transmission member Equipped with
The regulating means is arranged on the rotation transmitting member,
In a state in which the slide transmission member is disposed at the second slide position and the rotation transmission member is disposed at the second rotational position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other. rotation of the the first rotational position of the rotation transmitting member is restricted,
The restriction means is configured to be maintainable at the second position in a state in which the pair of wing members is closed or in a state where the driving force of the drive means is not applied and the pair of wing members is open. Yu Technical machine shall be the feature. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in Rukoto comprising a substrate box.

Images